Quarterlytics / Technology / Semiconductors / Smart Global

Smart Global

sgh · ASX Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker sgh
Exchange ASX
Sector Technology
Industry Semiconductors
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2018 Annual Report · Smart Global
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
S

l

a

t

e

r

&

G

o

r

d

o

n

L

i

m

i

t

e

d

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

8

SLATER & GORDON LIMITED

ANNUAL REPORT 2018

 
 
 
 
 
 
Contents

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018

03 Chair’s Report04 Chief Executive Officer´s Report 06 People and Culture07 Social Responsibility08 Financial Statements09 Directors’ Report31  Auditor’s Independence Declaration32  Consolidated Statement of Profit  or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income34  Consolidated Statement of Financial Position35  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity36  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows37 Notes to the Financial Statements79  Slater and Gordon Limited Directors’ Declaration80 Independent Auditor’s Report87 Additional ASX Information89 Corporate DirectoryWe have a shared purpose with our clients – 
our success is their success. 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018

01

We are incredibly passionate 
about achieving the very best 
outcomes for our clients, and 
delivering affordable access to 
justice for everyday Australians.

02

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Chair’s Report 

The Slater and Gordon FY18 financial results 
reflect a year of significant change.

While the financial report shows a net profit after tax of 
$113.7m (2017: $546.8m loss), this result was significantly 
affected by the Company’s one-off gain on the disposal of its 
UK business as part of its recapitalisation in December 2017.

The report also shows a net loss after tax on continuing 
operations, $31.9m (2017: $74.5m loss), which reflects 
costs associated with the Company’s divestments in parts 
of its business as well as its mostly completed but ongoing 
transformation program. As a result of this program, Slater 
and Gordon now has a stronger capital structure, a simplified 
operating model and a clearly defined service offering; 
giving the stability required to now focus on growing its 
core services.

The recapitalisation of the Company completed in December 
2017 has provided a strong capital structure with a more 
appropriate level of debt and increased liquidity. In addition, 
all UK operations and UK subsidiaries were separated from 
the Company, enabling both businesses to focus on their 
strategic strengths and reduce significant overheads.

The Company’s major shareholder has a strong global 
track record of restructuring businesses and nurturing their 
turnaround. Without their support the more than 12,000 
clients that Slater and Gordon helped last year would not 
have benefited from the support and expertise that the 
Company could provide. Our major shareholder believes 
in the strength of Slater and Gordon’s brand and its people, 
who are incredibly passionate about achieving the very best 
outcomes for our clients, and understands the Company’s 
success is built on this dedication to delivering for its clients.

experience across both the public and private sectors, 
working with corporations, governments and unions. 
In addition, they have considerable expertise in the 
transformation and turnaround of businesses and years 
of Board experience between them. I am proud to Chair 
a Board so diverse and with such depth of experience.

The new Board also has a deep understanding of the labour 
movement and the importance of delivering affordable access 
to justice for everyday Australians. The labour movement 
and its industrial arm is at the very core of the Company’s 
foundations, and our staff, Board and shareholders are 
deeply committed to it.

In the past twelve months, we have implemented a strong 
program of initiatives that we believe will set us up for 
long-term sustainability so we can continue to unlock 
access to justice for the thousands of Australians who need 
our help. This transformation to date would not have been 
possible without the tireless efforts of the Slater and Gordon 
family. I would like to thank the staff, leadership team 
and Board for their passion, professionalism and resolute 
commitment to our clients and the on-going success of the 
business. In particular, I would like to thank our new CEO, 
John Somerville, who has hit the ground running since he 
commenced in February and has provided strong leadership 
and a clear vision for the team.

I also want to thank our unions, regulators, industry bodies, 
sponsorship partners and business partners for the support 
they have given us as we have worked to stabilise the business. 
Now, I am very pleased to say, we have in place good 
strategy, good leadership and good governance. 

A new Board has been appointed, with Merrick Howes, 
Nils Stoesser, Hayden Stephens and myself appointed in 
December and Elana Rubin and Jacqui Walters appointed 
in March. The new Board brings to the table a wealth of 

James MacKenzie
Chair

03

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Chief Executive Officer´s Report

Slater and Gordon’s results reflect the work 
we have undertaken, but also the challenges 
we still face.

The financial report shows the Company ended the full year 
to 30 June 2018 with:

•  A total profit after tax of $113.7m (2017: $546.8m loss) 
being largely comprised of a net profit after tax of 
discontinued operations of $145.6m (2017: $472.4m loss), 
whereas the net loss after tax of continuing operations was 
$31.9m (2017: $74.5m loss). The significant net profit after 
tax on discontinued operations was primarily due to the gain 
on disposal of the Company’s UK operations which was 
part of the recapitalisation completed in December 2017;

•  Total revenue and other income from continuing 
operations of $159.3m (2017: $181.5m), impacted 
by the reduction in the size of the business;

•  Operating cash outflows generated from continuing 

operations of $8.0m (2017: $22.2m cash outflows); and

•  A significantly improved net asset position of $63.3m 

(2017: net liabilities of $248.8m) following restatement 
of the senior secured debt facilities and separation from 
the UK business.

FY18 has been a year of renewal for Slater and Gordon. 
The recapitalisation, approved by shareholders in December 
2017, delivered a stronger capital structure. We have 
developed a business strategy that has seen inroads made into 
restoring the viability and sustainability of the Company. It 
has enabled us to invest in improving systems and processes, 
including a significant upgrade to our IT systems, to deliver 
an even better service for our clients. Furthermore, the 
separation of the UK and the Australian businesses has 
enabled us to focus our resources and efforts on stabilising 
the Australian business.

A central part of this stabilisation has been a renewed 
focus on Slater and Gordon’s core strengths. Following 
an extensive review in late 2017 Slater and Gordon now has 
a more streamlined, contemporary service offering. The 
Company is focused on organically growing its core service 
areas of Personal Injury, Union Services, Class Actions, 
and Industrial and Employment Law; having retained a 

smaller general litigation practice in Melbourne focused on 
commercial and estate litigation. As part of the Company’s 
strong commitment to the Australian trade union movement, 
the Company has expanded its Union Services team and 
offering to maintain a Criminal and Family Law service and 
free wills for union clients.

A new Board and Executive Leadership Team, a focused 
business strategy and a stronger capital structure means 
Slater and Gordon can focus on doing what it does best – 
helping everyday Australians secure a better future by being 
trusted legal advocates for our clients. Our clients come to us 
at what is often the most vulnerable period of their lives and 
without us many of them would not be able to access justice. 
Despite the challenges of the past few years our people have 
continued to focus on and deliver consistently excellent 
outcomes for our clients. I want to commend their tireless 
dedication to and compassion for their clients. This absolute 
focus on delivering the best results for our clients permeates 
our Company and makes us fierce in our representation.

Our new advertising campaign, launched in February, 
reinforces our strong connection with our clients and reflects 
the important role Slater and Gordon plays in navigating a 
complex legal system to get the best results for them. In it our 
clients generously share their stories and their experiences 
with Slater and Gordon as their trusted legal advocates. You 
can view that campaign here https://youtu.be/-ZSfePDx3ic 

Slater and Gordon’s long history of achievements are 
formidable. It was built on hundreds of committed lawyers 
and staff being innovative, determined, passionate and the 
best in the legal profession. Despite the challenges of the 
past few years, this has not changed. Our brand is strong, 
we remain top of mind for people to call for expert legal 
services and our client satisfaction results remain high.

Whilst we still have work to do, we have come a long way in 
12 months. The fundamentals of the business are improving 
and will continue to improve so we can continue to do what 
we do best – unlocking access to justice for the thousands 
of Australians who need our help. 

John Somerville
Chief Executive Officer

04

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 201805

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018It is this absolute focus on delivering the best results for our clients that makes us fierce in our representation and permeates our firm.People and Culture

06

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Building Leadership StrengthA senior leadership transition took place over the course of the year with the appointment of a new Chief Executive Officer, along with a number of changes in Executive Leadership roles. Four of the eight Executive Leadership roles affected by the transition were filled internally, underscoring the high calibre of our internal talent. An additional four roles were recruited externally, demonstrating our ability to attract high calibre talent in the market.Focusing on our Core Strengths The Company announced in February that it had undertaken a review of its organisational structure to:• focus on our core legal practice areas of Personal Injury Law, Class Actions and Industrial and Employment Law, resulting in a downsizing of the general law business, by winding down or divesting the practice areas of Succession, Criminal Law and Family Law;• focus on commercial and estate litigation in a smaller general litigation practice in Melbourne;• expand Union Services to maintain a criminal and family law service offering and free wills for our union clients as part of our strong commitment to the Australian Trade Union movement; and• continue to focus on delivering the highest quality legal services to our clients.This work sees the Company return to its core strengths. Moving forward, Slater and Gordon now employs over 800 people in Victoria, ACT, NSW, Queensland and WA.The People StrategyThe focus of the Company’s People plan is to empower our people to achieve success for their clients and in their careers resulting in pride and optimism. People choose to work at Slater and Gordon to experience meaningful careers where they are recognised, rewarded and developed. The values of ‘Do it Right’, ‘Work well with Others’ and ‘Take the Lead’ are at the core of our People practices, so the ‘what’ and the ‘how’ of the ways of working are balanced.DiversitySlater and Gordon prides itself on the richness of our diversity. The Company is proud to have 33% female Board representation. Diversity is also strong in the management teams with women comprising 50% of our Executive Leadership team and 45% of senior managers.The people the Company employs are as diverse as our clients. They live and work in their community. In the work they undertake for their clients they provide support for people at a difficult time in their lives. In many cases access to justice is made easier for clients by speaking the native languages of clients including Vietnamese, Cantonese, Mandarin, Korean, Hindi, PNG Pidgin, Dari, Turkish, Arabic, Greek, Croatian, Italian, Russian, Ukrainian, Bosnian, Serbian, French, Macedonian, Spanish, Polish Swahili and Igbo (Nigerian).Social Responsibility

07

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Slater and Gordon is built on values of social justice and we are committed to giving back to our communities. Our social responsibility program has three key areas of focus: assisting people with disease and disability, addressing inequality and disadvantage and encouraging people to engage in healthy activity and lifestyles.One of the defining features of our Company is our relationship with the local communities in which we operate. We encourage and support that relationship through sponsorship activities, volunteering activities and pro bono legal support, as well as giving staff the opportunity to donate a portion of their wage to our Staff Giving Program, which goes towards funding local projects throughout Australia via the Slater and Gordon Community Fund.Slater and Gordon also gives back through its commitment to philanthropic activity, having established the Community Fund in 2001 and an Asbestos Research Fund in 2004.In 2014 the Company broadened its commitment to achieving outcomes for people suffering disease and disability by establishing the Health Projects and Research Fund.The Slater and Gordon Community FundOur Community Fund is a philanthropic fund which offers grants to community groups.Financial support is given to projects and initiatives which further the social responsibility program. The fund is supported by donations from Slater and Gordon staff via our Staff Giving Program as well as by the Company itself.Health Projects and Research Fund The Slater and Gordon Health Projects and Research Fund is a philanthropic grants initiative focused on improving care and treatment for people with asbestos related illnesses, occupation-caused cancers or significant disability caused by a catastrophic injury. The fund also provides small ongoing education grants to medical and health professionals, who are dedicated to the prevention, treatment, care and support of people who have an asbestos related disease, work-related cancer or a catastrophic spinal or brain injury.Pro Bono WorkSlater and Gordon has a proud history of providing pro bono and public interest legal work in Australia. Our lawyers undertake pro bono work in many areas of law and through that work have assisted members of the community, including people with severe disabilities, charities and community and indigenous groups, as well as volunteering at community legal centres.VolunteeringWe are proud to say that many of our staff actively participate in their local community and we support and encourage them by offering volunteering leave. Our volunteering policy allows staff to take up to two days per year volunteer leave. We recognise that some staff choose to volunteer outside their normal hours of work and we allow staff to access time in lieu entitlements. Financial Statements

09  Directors’ Report

31  Auditor’s Independence Declaration

32  Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income for the Year Ended 30 June 2018

34  Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 30 June 2018

35  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity for the Year Ended 30 June 2018

36  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows for the Year Ended 30 June 2018

37  Notes to the Financial Statements for the Year Ended 30 June 2018

79  Slater and Gordon Limited Directors’ Declaration

80  Independent Auditor’s Report

87  Additional ASX Information

89  Corporate Directory

08
08

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

The  Directors  present  their  report,  together  with  the  financial  report  of  the  consolidated  entity  consisting  of  Slater  &
Gordon Limited (“the Company”) and its controlled entities (jointly referred to as “the Group”), for the financial year ended
30  June  2018  and  the  auditor’s  report  thereon.  This  financial  report  has  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  Australian 
Accounting  Standards.  Compliance  with  Australian  Accounting  Standards  ensures  compliance  with  International 
Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”). 

Directors 

The Directors in office at any time during the financial year and up to the date of this report are:

•

James MacKenzie – Chair (appointed 22 December 2017)

• Merrick Howes (appointed 22 December 2017)

• Elana Rubin (appointed 6 March 2018)

• Hayden Stephens (appointed 6 December 2017)

• Nils Stoesser (appointed 22 December 2017)

•

Jacqui Walters (appointed 6 March 2018)

• Tom Brown (ceased as Non-Executive Director 22 December 2017)

• Andrew Grech (ceased as Non-Executive Director 6 December 2017)

•

•

James M. Millar (ceased as Non-Executive Director 22 December 2017)

John Skippen (ceased as Chair and Non-Executive Director 22 December 2017)

Details of the skills, experience, expertise and special responsibilities of each Director are set out in the “Information on 
Directors and Company Secretary” section of this report.

Principal Activities 

The principal activity of the Group during the financial year until December 2017 was the operation of legal practices in 
Australia and the United Kingdom (“UK”) providing legal services in two main areas of consumer law – Personal Injury 
Law and General Law. From December 2017, the principal activity of the Group was the operations of legal practices in 
Australia. 

Review of Operations 

The Slater and Gordon vision 

The Company’s vision is to help everyday Australians secure a better future by being trusted legal advocates for clients 
and by building strong relationships within the communities in which the Company operates.

The Company does not represent the big end of town.  The Company helps unlock justice for everyday Australians who 
it  believes  have a  right  of  redress or  compensation,  where there is a  considerable  power  imbalance.    The  Company’s 
clients come to the Company at what is often the most vulnerable time of their lives.  Without the Company’s services, 
many of the Company’s clients would not be able to access justice.  

The Company treats clients with compassion and respect and the Company prides itself on delivering the highest quality 
legal  services  to  them.    This  absolute  focus  on  client  results  makes  the  Company fierce  in  its representation  and 
permeates the firm.  The Company has a shared purpose with its clients – the Company’s success is dependent upon 
their success.

The  Company  has a  history  of  innovating  and  is active  in protecting  and  enhancing  the  legal  rights  of  clients.    The 
Company’s advocacy extends beyond individual cases to include the issues of social justice and individual rights more 
broadly.

The Company’s diversity mirrors the diversity of its clients and its communities.

The Company has three core values:

+

Do it right – be passionate about the quality of the work and always achieve the highest professional standards
in order to exceed client’s expectations

+ Work well with others – share knowledge, experience and ideas.  Encourage respect and collaboration within

the firm and the community

+

Take the lead – challenge ourselves to be the best, strive for innovation and be committed to doing everything
that can be done to help clients achieve their goals

Slater & Gordon Limited

09

Page 1 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Strategic pillars 

• Stable foundations – a sustainable and profitable base
• Use and strengthen our brand
• Get governance right – balance risk and return
• Help our people be successful
•
• Grow existing services
• Grow new services consistent with brand and aspiration

Increase efficiency and productivity

Managing risks

The  following  details some of  the material  business  risks  that could  affect  the growth  of  the  Company’s core services. 
These are not listed in order of significance and do not comprise every risk that the Company may be exposed to. 

Description of key risk 

Key risk mitigation 

Regulatory & Industry Reform 
The Company’s operations are subject to extensive
regulation. Adverse regulatory or legislative changes
may adversely impact the Company’s operations,
financial performance and position.

Comprehensive stakeholder engagement, informed
discussion, government consultation to advocate our position, 
modelling of the potential impact of changes and business 
model and the optimisation of practice management service 
offerings are initiatives we use to monitor, manage and protect 
against potential legislative changes.

Operations
There are a number of key operational risks which arise 
directly from the operations of the Company as a major
participant in the Australian legal services industry,
including strategic and business decisions, technology
and cyber risk, reputation risk, fraud, compliance with 
legal and regulatory obligations, counterparty 
performance under outsourcing and referral 
arrangements, business continuity planning, legal risk,
data integrity risk, client default risk, key personnel risk 
and external events.
The Company’s financial performance and position 
have been, and in the future may continue to be, 
impacted by these risks.

Competition and Market Share
The Company operates in a competitive market,
competing for its offering of personal injury and/or other 
legal services. Competition is on the basis of a number 
of factors, including the quality of advice and service, 
innovation, reputation and price. The financial 
performance may be adversely impacted as a result of 
these risks. 

People
The Company may be unable to attract, retain and 
develop talented people which may limit its ability to 
deliver its growth initiatives. 

Capital Management
Following the recapitalisation, funding and management 
of capital and liquidity remains a key focus. Additional 
funds may need to be obtained through capital raisings 
or cash flow may need to be managed through seeking
to negotiate current debt arrangements.

The Company has business performance improvement 
programs in place designed to standardise, centralise, 
optimise and promote efficient and innovative operating
platforms, IT systems and people strategies.  

Monitoring of competitive markets to understand competitive
activities and the ongoing demand for our services and 
continued expansion of business development initiatives. 

People, culture and remuneration initiatives are being 
undertaken to further support and engage our people. 

Close involvement of the Company’s lenders to ensure liquidity 
needs are monitored closely and arrangements are put in 
place where necessary to bridge short term liquidity needs. 

Refer to the Company’s Corporate Governance Statement for details of the Company’s risk management framework. 

10

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 2 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Strategic pillars 

• Stable foundations – a sustainable and profitable base

• Use and strengthen our brand

• Get governance right – balance risk and return

• Help our people be successful

•

Increase efficiency and productivity

• Grow existing services

• Grow new services consistent with brand and aspiration

Managing risks

The  following  details some of  the material  business  risks  that could  affect  the growth  of  the  Company’s core services. 

These are not listed in order of significance and do not comprise every risk that the Company may be exposed to. 

Description of key risk 

Key risk mitigation 

Regulatory & Industry Reform 

The Company’s operations are subject to extensive

Comprehensive stakeholder engagement, informed

regulation. Adverse regulatory or legislative changes

discussion, government consultation to advocate our position, 

may adversely impact the Company’s operations,

modelling of the potential impact of changes and business 

financial performance and position.

model and the optimisation of practice management service 

offerings are initiatives we use to monitor, manage and protect 

against potential legislative changes.

The Company has business performance improvement 

programs in place designed to standardise, centralise, 

optimise and promote efficient and innovative operating

platforms, IT systems and people strategies.  

Operations

There are a number of key operational risks which arise 

directly from the operations of the Company as a major

participant in the Australian legal services industry,

including strategic and business decisions, technology

and cyber risk, reputation risk, fraud, compliance with 

legal and regulatory obligations, counterparty 

performance under outsourcing and referral 

arrangements, business continuity planning, legal risk,

data integrity risk, client default risk, key personnel risk 

and external events.

The Company’s financial performance and position 

have been, and in the future may continue to be, 

impacted by these risks.

Competition and Market Share

The Company operates in a competitive market,

Monitoring of competitive markets to understand competitive

competing for its offering of personal injury and/or other 

activities and the ongoing demand for our services and 

legal services. Competition is on the basis of a number 

continued expansion of business development initiatives. 

of factors, including the quality of advice and service, 

innovation, reputation and price. The financial 

performance may be adversely impacted as a result of 

The Company may be unable to attract, retain and 

People, culture and remuneration initiatives are being 

develop talented people which may limit its ability to 

undertaken to further support and engage our people. 

these risks. 

People

deliver its growth initiatives. 

Capital Management

Following the recapitalisation, funding and management 

Close involvement of the Company’s lenders to ensure liquidity 

of capital and liquidity remains a key focus. Additional 

needs are monitored closely and arrangements are put in 

funds may need to be obtained through capital raisings 

place where necessary to bridge short term liquidity needs. 

or cash flow may need to be managed through seeking

to negotiate current debt arrangements.

Refer to the Company’s Corporate Governance Statement for details of the Company’s risk management framework. 

Directors’ Report 

Financial review 

The Group reported a net loss before tax from continuing operations of $29,238,000 for the year ended 30 June 2018, an 
improvement of 70% from the prior year. The improvement was substantially driven by cost reductions in employee and 
rental costs, consistent  with  the  strategy  to  review  the  business  footprint.  The  prior  year also included  significant non-
recurring  expenses,  particularly  consultant  fees  (FY18  $7,103,000:  FY17  $17,669,000)  and  an  impairment  charge  of 
$10,959,000.

The  Group  permanently  reduced  its  outstanding  secured  debt  under  the Recapitalisation (refer  below).  As  at  30  June
2018,  the  Group’s  total  borrowings  were  $155,119,000.  The  Group  has  a  positive  net  current  asset  balance  of 
$122,398,000 and positive overall net asset balance of $63,295,000.  

Significant Changes in the State of Affairs 

On 6 December 2017, Andrew Grech resigned as a Director and Hayden Stephens was appointed as a Director. On 22 
December 2017, the Company completed a major restructure with the approval and implementation of two schemes of 
arrangements.

The Senior Lender Scheme of Arrangement resulted in:

• A reduction of $636.6 million in secured debt owed by the Company and its Australian subsidiaries;

• Separation of the UK operations and UK subsidiaries from the Group and transfer of those entities to an entity wholly

owned by the Company’s senior lenders; and

• The  issuance  of  66,050,874  ordinary  shares  in  the  Company  to  the  senior  lenders,  representing  95%  of  the

Company’s total issued capital.

The Shareholder Claimant Scheme of Arrangement resulted in the compromise and settlement of all shareholder claims 
against  the  Company  arising  out  of  the  matters  which  were  the  subject  of  a  number  of  shareholder  class  actions.  All 
class  actions  were  settled  by  the  establishment  of  a  settlement  fund  with  KordaMentha  appointed administrator  of  the 
fund from which shareholders claims are to be paid.

The  Senior  Lender  Scheme  of  Arrangement  has  been  implemented  and  is  now  complete.  The  Shareholder  Claimant 
Scheme of Arrangement remains on foot until the settlement fund has been paid out in full.

Further,  following  implementation  of  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme  of  Arrangement  in  December  2017,  a  number  of 
changes to the Company’s Board took effect, with Merrick Howes, James MacKenzie and Nils Stoesser appointed to the 
Board and Tom Brown, James Millar and John Skippen resigned.

In March 2018, Elana Rubin and Jacqui Walters were appointed to the Board.

Events Subsequent to Reporting Date 

The Directors are not aware of any significant events since the end of the reporting period.

Likely Developments 

The Group is now focused on organically growing its core service areas of Personal Injury Law, Union Services, Class 
Actions, Industrial and Employment Law and Commercial and Estate Litigation in Australia.

Environmental Regulation 

The Group’s operations are not subject to any significant environmental regulations or laws in Australia. 

Environmental, Social and Corporate Governance 

Pursuant  to  ASX  Corporate  Governance  Principle  and  Recommendation  7.4,  which  provides  that  companies  disclose 
any material exposure to economic, environmental or social sustainability risks, the Company does not consider that the 
operations are materially exposed to environmental or social sustainability risk.

Dividends Paid, Recommended and Declared 

The Group has not declared or paid any dividends in respect of the 30 June 2018 financial year. 

The dividends paid and declared since the start of the financial year are as follows:

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 2 

Slater & Gordon Limited

Dividends on ordinary shares 
No interim dividend paid in 2018 (2017: No interim dividend paid)

No final dividend for 2017 (2016: No final dividend paid) 

2018 
$’000 

-

-

-

2017 
$’000 

-

-

-

11

Page 3 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Share Options 

No options over unissued shares or interests in the Company were granted during or since the end of the financial year. 
There were no options outstanding at the end of the financial year.

Indemnification and Insurance of Directors and Officers and Auditors 

During  the  financial  year,  the  Group  has  provided  an  indemnity  or  entered  an  agreement  to  indemnify,  and  paid 
insurance  premiums  for  a  twelve-month  period  in  respect  of  Directors,  Officers  and  the  Company  Secretary  of  the 
Company against a liability brought against such an Officer.

Further  disclosure  required  under  section  300(9)  of  the  Corporations  Act  2001 is  prohibited  under  the  terms  of  the 
contract.

The Group has agreed (in certain circumstances) to indemnify its auditors, Ernst & Young, as part of the terms of its audit 
engagement agreement. No payment has been made to indemnify Ernst & Young during or since the financial year.

Information on Directors and Company Secretary 

The skills, experience, expertise and special responsibilities of each person who has been a Director of the Company at 
any time during or since the end of the financial year is provided below, together with details of the Company Secretary 
as at the year end.

James MacKenzie 
B.Bus, FCA, FAICD
Chair
Independent Non-Executive
Director
Appointed 22 December
2017

Experience 
James  is  the  Chair  of  Slater  and  Gordon,  having  joined  the  organisation  in  December 
2017.
James MacKenzie is an experienced Australian company director. He currently serves as 
President of the Victorian Arts Centre Trust and Chairman of Victorian Funds Management 
Corporation and Development Victoria.
James was previously Chair of the Transport Accident Commission (TAC) and Worksafe 
Victoria,  Managing  Director  of  Funds  Management  and  Insurance  at  the  ANZ  Banking 
Group,  Chief  Executive  Officer  of  Norwich  Union  Australia,  and  TAC  Chief  Executive 
Officer.  He  has  been  a  member  of  the  COAG  Business  Advisory  Forum  and  a  previous 
director of VFMC.
James  has  a  Bachelor  of  Business  from  Swinburne  University,  and  is  a  Fellow  of  the 
Australian  Institute  of  Company  Directors  and  the  Institute  of  Chartered  Accountants  in 
Australia.
In 2001, he was awarded the Centenary Medal for services to Public Administration.
James is Chair of the Board and is also a member of the Audit and Risk Committee and 
the People and Culture Committee.

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years 
Melco Crown Entertainment Limited (NASDAQ:MPEL)(2008 to 2016)

Merrick Howes 
BA LLB
Non-Independent Non-
Executive Director
Appointed 22 December 
2017

Experience 
Merrick  joined  Anchorage  Capital  Group  in  Sydney  in  November  2011.  Prior  to  joining 
Anchorage, he worked at Aviron Capital, a firm based in Sydney, Australia. Prior to Aviron, 
Merrick was the Co-founder and Managing Director at Shearwater Capital, where he focused 
on special situations and distressed debt investments. Prior to Shearwater, he was a Partner 
and  Managing  Director  in  the  Principal  Investment  Area  at  Goldman  Sachs  in  Australia. 
Merrick was also a Managing Director and European Head of Global Structured Products at 
Merrill  Lynch  in  Hong  Kong  and  London.  He  also  worked  at  Macquarie  Bank  Limited  from 
1989  to  1998.  Merrick  received  a  BA  in  Accounting  and  a  Bachelor  of  Laws  from  the 
Australian National University. 

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years
None

12

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 4 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Share Options 

No options over unissued shares or interests in the Company were granted during or since the end of the financial year. 

There were no options outstanding at the end of the financial year.

Indemnification and Insurance of Directors and Officers and Auditors 

During  the  financial  year,  the  Group  has  provided  an  indemnity  or  entered  an  agreement  to  indemnify,  and  paid 

insurance  premiums  for  a  twelve-month  period  in  respect  of  Directors,  Officers  and  the  Company  Secretary  of  the 

Company against a liability brought against such an Officer.

Further  disclosure  required  under  section  300(9)  of  the  Corporations  Act  2001 is  prohibited  under  the  terms  of  the 

contract.

The Group has agreed (in certain circumstances) to indemnify its auditors, Ernst & Young, as part of the terms of its audit 

engagement agreement. No payment has been made to indemnify Ernst & Young during or since the financial year.

Information on Directors and Company Secretary 

The skills, experience, expertise and special responsibilities of each person who has been a Director of the Company at 

any time during or since the end of the financial year is provided below, together with details of the Company Secretary 

as at the year end.

James MacKenzie 

B.Bus, FCA, FAICD

Chair

Director

2017

James  is  the  Chair  of  Slater  and  Gordon,  having  joined  the  organisation  in  December 

Experience 

2017.

Independent Non-Executive

James MacKenzie is an experienced Australian company director. He currently serves as 

President of the Victorian Arts Centre Trust and Chairman of Victorian Funds Management 

Appointed 22 December

Corporation and Development Victoria.

James was previously Chair of the Transport Accident Commission (TAC) and Worksafe 

Victoria,  Managing  Director  of  Funds  Management  and  Insurance  at  the  ANZ  Banking 

Group,  Chief  Executive  Officer  of  Norwich  Union  Australia,  and  TAC  Chief  Executive 

Officer.  He  has  been  a  member  of  the  COAG  Business  Advisory  Forum  and  a  previous 

director of VFMC.

Australia.

James  has  a  Bachelor  of  Business  from  Swinburne  University,  and  is  a  Fellow  of  the 

Australian  Institute  of  Company  Directors  and  the  Institute  of  Chartered  Accountants  in 

In 2001, he was awarded the Centenary Medal for services to Public Administration.

James is Chair of the Board and is also a member of the Audit and Risk Committee and 

the People and Culture Committee.

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years 

Melco Crown Entertainment Limited (NASDAQ:MPEL)(2008 to 2016)

Merrick Howes 

Experience 

BA LLB

Merrick  joined  Anchorage  Capital  Group  in  Sydney  in  November  2011.  Prior  to  joining 

Non-Independent Non-

Anchorage, he worked at Aviron Capital, a firm based in Sydney, Australia. Prior to Aviron, 

Executive Director

Appointed 22 December 

2017

Merrick was the Co-founder and Managing Director at Shearwater Capital, where he focused 

on special situations and distressed debt investments. Prior to Shearwater, he was a Partner 

and  Managing  Director  in  the  Principal  Investment  Area  at  Goldman  Sachs  in  Australia. 

Merrick was also a Managing Director and European Head of Global Structured Products at 

Merrill  Lynch  in  Hong  Kong  and  London.  He  also  worked  at  Macquarie  Bank  Limited  from 

1989  to  1998.  Merrick  received  a  BA  in  Accounting  and  a  Bachelor  of  Laws  from  the 

Australian National University. 

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years

None

Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretary (continued) 

Elana Rubin 
BA(Hons) MA FFin FAICD 
FIML
Independent Non-Executive 
Director
Appointed 6 March 2018

Experience 

Elana has over 20 years’ experience as a non-executive company director, across diverse 
sectors. She is currently a Director of Mirvac and AfterPay Touch Group, as well as a 
number of unlisted companies and government boards.

Elana was previously the Chair of AustralianSuper and WorkSafe Victoria, and a Director of 
TAC (Vic). Other previous board roles covered the financial services, insurance, 
infrastructure, professional services, and not-for-profit sectors. 

Before becoming a full time non-executive director, Elana worked for one of the (then) 
largest industry funds and the ACTU. She is a member of Chief Executive Women and
Women Corporate Directors International. Her career reflects an understanding of 
corporate social licence to operate and a deep commitment to culture, diversity, social 
equity and participation.

Elana  is  a  member  of  the  Audit  and  Risk  Committee  and  the  People  and  Culture 
Committee.

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years
Mirvac Limited (ASX:MGR)(2010 to current)
Afterpay Touch Group Limited (ASX:APT)( 2017 to current)
Touchcorp Limited (ASX: TCH)(2015 to 2017) 

Hayden Stephens 
BA LLB 
Non-Independent Non-
Executive Director
Appointed 6 December 
2017

Experience 
Hayden is a Non-Executive Director at Slater and Gordon.
Previously, Hayden was Chief Executive Officer, Australia and prior to that held executive 
leadership positions across group, service and geographic business units.
Hayden  started  at  Slater  and  Gordon  in  1993  in  Melbourne.  In  the  decade  that  followed, 
Hayden specialised in personal injury law and was involved in a number of ground breaking 
legal cases. His work included acting for persons in public and product liability law, assisting 
asbestos disease sufferers and acting for victims of child sex abuse in clergy institutions.
In late 1999, Hayden was appointed leader of the firm’s operations in Western Australia and 
remained in this role until 2004.
Between  2004  - 2009,  Hayden  held  leadership  positions  in  the  firm’s National  Workers' 
Compensation  practice  group.  Among  his  achievements  in  this  role,  Hayden  worked 
proactively with stakeholders to help shape legislative reform of Victorian personal injuries 
compensation.  Hayden  has  since  continued  his  work  with  key  stakeholders,  State  and 
Federal Government and Regulatory bodies. 
Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years
None

Nils Stoesser 
MEng, ACA
Non-Independent Non-
Executive Director
Appointed 22 December 
2017

Experience 
Nils joined Anchorage Capital Group in May 2016 as a member of the Portfolio Group. As 
part of the Portfolio Group, Nils is responsible for performing operational due diligence on 
potential  investments,  and  enhancing  Anchorage’s  ability  to  drive  operational  and 
strategic  change  in  companies  where  Anchorage  has  a  position  of  influence.  Before 
joining  Anchorage,  he  was  Vice  Chairman  of  the  Supervisory  Board  and  Advisor  to  the 
CEO  and  Board  of  Management  at  Fokker  Technologies  Group.  Prior  to  his  time  at 
Fokker,  Nils  was  a  founding  partner  of  Arle  Capital  Partners,  the  successor  firm  to 
Candover  Partners  Limited,  where  he  was  a  Director.  Nils  started  his  career  at  Arthur 
Andersen.  Nils  received  a  Master’s  in  Mechanical  Engineering  from  the  University  of 
Newcastle  upon  Tyne  and  is  a  member  of  the  Institute  of  Chartered  Accountants  in 
England and Wales (ICAEW).
Nils is Chair of the People and Culture Committee.

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years
None

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 4 

Slater & Gordon Limited

13

Page 5 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretary (continued) 

Jacqui Walters 
BCom (Accounting and 
Finance) GAICD  

Independent Non-Executive 
Director

Appointed 6 March 2018

Experience 
Jacqui  joined  the  Slater  &  Gordon  Board  in  March  2018.  Jacqui  has  over  25  years’ 
experience in delivering and leading strategy and change projects in both the public and 
private sector. She has international experience across many industry sectors. Her work 
has ranged from whole of organisation transformation and restructuring to highly specific 
areas  such  as  major  capital  project  delivery,  new  product  introduction,  professional 
services strategy and performance, and post-merger culture alignment.  
An  experienced  professional  services  leader  with  over  20  years’  experience  working  for 
top  tier  management  consulting  firms,  she  has  established  a  number  of  new  practices, 
and  held  leadership  roles  focussed  on  professional  services  growth  strategies  and 
business  performance,  including  merger  and  acquisition  activities. The  common  theme 
across  Jacqui’s  broad  experience  is  the  desire  to  solve  complex  problems,  create  real 
value for her clients and build and lead powerful teams.
Jacqui is a founding partner of Era Innovation, a boutique advisory firm working with large 
corporates to identify, select and commercialise growth opportunities.
Jacqui  is  a  Board  Member  and  Chair  of  the  Risk  and  Audit  Committee  for  Building 
Queensland  and  established  and  Chairs  the  Citytrain  Response  Unit  (oversighting  the 
transformation of Queensland Rail and public transport in Queensland).
Jacqui is Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee 

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years
None

Tom Brown 

MA

Experience 

Tom Brown was a Non-Executive Director from September 2016. 

Independent Non-Executive 
Director 

Tom Brown is one of Australia’s most senior HR Directors with more than 20 years’ Board 
level experience across multiple industrial sectors. 

Ceased 22 December 2017 

Tom has held senior executive positions in global listed companies including Mobil, BHP
Billiton,  Allied  Domecq,  Brambles  and  Rolls  Royce  in  Europe,  Africa,  the  USA  and 
Australia  including  Board  level  experience  across  multiple  industrial sectors including  Oil 
and Gas, Mining, FMCG, Industrial Services, Utilities, Aeronautical and Marine. 

Tom has led transformation programs in both high growth and turnaround environments. 

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years
Gooroo Ventures Ltd (ASX:GOO)(2017 to current)    

Andrew Grech 

LLB MAICD

Non-Independent Non-
Executive Director 

Ceased 6 December 2017

Experience 

Andrew joined Slater and Gordon in 1994 and was appointed Managing Director in 2000. 
Before being appointed Managing Director, Andrew worked in most of Slater and Gordon’s 
litigation practice areas, across both high-profile class actions and individual compensation 
claims. Andrew brought to the Board extensive experience as a legal practitioner and law 
firm manager.  Andrew was a Non-Executive Director from 29 June 2017 upon ceasing as 
Group Managing Director. 

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years
None

14

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 6 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Directors’ Report 

Information on Directors and Company Secretary (continued) 

Information on Directors and Company Secretary (continued) 

Jacqui Walters 

Experience 

James M. Millar AM 

Experience 

BCom (Accounting and 

Jacqui  joined  the  Slater  &  Gordon  Board  in  March  2018.  Jacqui  has  over  25  years’ 

Finance) GAICD  

Independent Non-Executive 

Director

experience in delivering and leading strategy and change projects in both the public and 

private sector. She has international experience across many industry sectors. Her work 

has ranged from whole of organisation transformation and restructuring to highly specific 

areas  such  as  major  capital  project  delivery,  new  product  introduction,  professional 

Appointed 6 March 2018

services strategy and performance, and post-merger culture alignment.  

BCom FCA FAICD

James was appointed a Director of the Company in December 2015.

Independent Non-Executive 
Director  

Ceased 22 December 2017

James is a former Chief Executive Officer and Oceania Area Managing Partner of Ernst & 
Young (now EY) and was a member of the Ernst & Young Global Board. His career prior 
to the leadership roles at Ernst & Young was as a corporate reconstruction professional. 

In 2012 James was appointed a Member in the General Division of the Order of Australia 
for service to Business & Commerce and for Community Leadership.

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years

Fairfax Media Limited (ASX:FXJ)(2012 to current) 

Non-Director – Macquarie Media Ltd (ASX:MRN)(2015 to current) 

Non-Executive Director – Mirvac Limited (ASX:MGR)(2009 to current) 

Non-Executive Director – Helloworld Travel Limited (ASX:HLO)(2010 to 2016)

John Skippen 
ACA
Chair
Independent Non-Executive 
Director 
Ceased 22 December 2017

Experience 
John was a Board member from 2010 and Chair of the Board from 2012. 

John  has  over  30  years’  experience  as  a  chartered  accountant  and  was  the  former 
Executive  Finance  Director  of  Harvey  Norman  Holdings  Ltd.  John  brought to  the  Board 
extensive  financial,  public  company  and  retail  experience  and  skills  in  financial 
management, general management, mergers and acquisitions and strategy. 

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years
Flexigroup Limited (ASX: FXL) (2006 to current) 
Super Retail Group Ltd (ASX: SUL) (2008 to 2016)  

Company Secretary 

Michael Neilson 
BA LLB GAICD FGIA
General Counsel and 
Company Secretary
Appointed 20 April 2018

Experience 

Michael is General Counsel and Company Secretary, having commenced in April 2018.
Prior  to  joining  Slater  and  Gordon,  Michael  was  at  Crown  Resorts  Limited  (ASX:CWN),
where he was Group General Counsel and Company Secretary for almost ten years and, 
prior to that, he was General Counsel for Crown Melbourne. 
From 1997 to 2004, Michael was at the Lend Lease Group where he was General Counsel 
and Company Secretary of General Property Trust (ASX:GPT) (which was then managed 
by Lend Lease) and prior to that General Counsel of Lend Lease Property Management.
Michael started his career in the commercial practice at Herbert Geer & Rundle where he 
spent ten years before moving in house.
Michael  has  a  strong  track  record  in  implementing  governance,  legal  and  regulatory 
frameworks  in  complex,  multinational  businesses  as  well  as  deep  experience  managing 
risk  and  compliance  in  challenging  environments. Michael  is  Chair  of  the  Council  of 
Camberwell Grammar School.

An  experienced  professional  services  leader  with  over  20  years’  experience  working  for 

top  tier  management  consulting  firms,  she  has  established  a  number  of  new  practices, 

and  held  leadership  roles  focussed  on  professional  services  growth  strategies  and 

business  performance,  including  merger  and  acquisition  activities. The  common  theme 

across  Jacqui’s  broad  experience  is  the  desire  to  solve  complex  problems,  create  real 

value for her clients and build and lead powerful teams.

Jacqui is a founding partner of Era Innovation, a boutique advisory firm working with large 

corporates to identify, select and commercialise growth opportunities.

Jacqui  is  a  Board  Member  and  Chair  of  the  Risk  and  Audit  Committee  for  Building 

Queensland  and  established  and  Chairs  the  Citytrain  Response  Unit  (oversighting  the 

transformation of Queensland Rail and public transport in Queensland).

Jacqui is Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee 

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years

None

Experience 

Tom Brown 

MA

Director 

Tom Brown was a Non-Executive Director from September 2016. 

Independent Non-Executive 

Tom Brown is one of Australia’s most senior HR Directors with more than 20 years’ Board 

level experience across multiple industrial sectors. 

Ceased 22 December 2017 

Tom has held senior executive positions in global listed companies including Mobil, BHP

Billiton,  Allied  Domecq,  Brambles  and  Rolls  Royce  in  Europe,  Africa,  the  USA  and 

Australia  including  Board  level  experience  across  multiple  industrial sectors including  Oil 

and Gas, Mining, FMCG, Industrial Services, Utilities, Aeronautical and Marine. 

Tom has led transformation programs in both high growth and turnaround environments. 

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years

Gooroo Ventures Ltd (ASX:GOO)(2017 to current)    

Experience 

Andrew Grech 

LLB MAICD

Non-Independent Non-

Executive Director 

Ceased 6 December 2017

Andrew joined Slater and Gordon in 1994 and was appointed Managing Director in 2000. 

Before being appointed Managing Director, Andrew worked in most of Slater and Gordon’s 

litigation practice areas, across both high-profile class actions and individual compensation 

claims. Andrew brought to the Board extensive experience as a legal practitioner and law 

firm manager.  Andrew was a Non-Executive Director from 29 June 2017 upon ceasing as 

Group Managing Director. 

None

Other directorships of listed companies held in the last three years

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 6 

Slater & Gordon Limited

15

Page 7 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Directors’ Meetings 

The number of meetings of the Board of Directors and of each Board committee held during the financial year and the 
number of meetings attended by each Director were: 

Board of Directors 

Audit and Risk Committee 

People and Culture Committee 

Eligible to 
attend 

Attended 

Eligible to 
attend 

Attended 

Eligible to 
attend 

Attended 

J MacKenzie6
M Howes3

E Rubin4

H Stephens8

N Stoesser7

J Walters5

J Skippen1

T Brown1

A Grech2

J Millar1

8 

8 

5 

8 

8 

5 

11

11

10

11

8 

8 

5 

8 

7 

5 

11

10

10

11

2 

2 

-

-

-

2 

-

-

-

-

2 

1 

-

-

-

2 

-

-

-

-

2 

-

2 

-

2 

-

-

-

-

-

2 

-

2 

-

2 

-

-

-

-

-

1 Ceased as Director on 22 December 2017

2 Ceased as Director on 6 December 2017

3 Commenced as Director on 22 December 2017, ceased as a member of the Audit and Risk Committee on 20 June 2018

4 Commenced as Director on 6 March 2018

5 Commenced as Director on 6 March 2018

6 Commenced as Director on 22 December 2017

7 Commenced as Director on 22 December 2017

8 Commenced as Director on 6 December 2017

Directors’ Interests in Shares 

Directors’ relevant interests in shares of the Company as at the date of this report are detailed below.

Ordinary Shares of the Company 

Performance Rights 

J MacKenzie 
M Howes
H Stephens

N Stoesser

E Rubin

J Walters

J Skippen

T Brown

A Grech

J Millar

-
-

12,526

-

-

-

1,000

-

66,307

-

-
-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Directors’ Interest in Contracts 

Directors’ interests in contracts are disclosed in Note 6.1 to the financial statements.

Auditor’s Independence Declaration 

A copy of the auditor’s independence declaration as required under section 307C of the Corporations Act 2001 in relation 
to the audit for the financial year is provided with this report.

Proceedings on behalf of the Company 

No person has applied to the Court under section 237 of the Corporations Act 2001 for leave to bring proceedings on 
behalf of the Company, or to intervene in any proceedings to which the Company is a party, for the purpose of taking 
responsibility on behalf of the Company for all or part of those proceedings.

16

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 8 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Non-Audit Services 

Written approval for non-audit services is provided by resolution of the Audit and Risk Committee and approval is notified 
to the Board of Directors. There were no non-audit services provided by the auditors of the Group during the year. The 
Directors are satisfied that the provision of the non-audit services during the year by the auditor is compatible with the 
general  standard  of  independence  for  auditors  imposed  by  the  Corporations  Act  2001. The  nature  and  scope  of  each 
type of non-audit service provided means that auditor independence was not compromised.

Rounding of Amounts 

The amounts contained in the Directors’ Report and Financial Report have been rounded to the nearest thousand dollars 
(where  rounding  is  applicable)  under  the  option  available  to  the  Company  under  ASIC  Corporations  (Rounding  in 
Financial/Directors’ Reports) Instrument 2016/191.The Company is an entity to which the Class Order applies.

The Directors’ Report and accompanying Audited Remuneration Report is signed in accordance with a resolution of the 
Directors.

3 Commenced as Director on 22 December 2017, ceased as a member of the Audit and Risk Committee on 20 June 2018

James MacKenzie

Chair

Melbourne

29 August 2018

Directors’ relevant interests in shares of the Company as at the date of this report are detailed below.

Ordinary Shares of the Company 

Performance Rights 

The number of meetings of the Board of Directors and of each Board committee held during the financial year and the 

number of meetings attended by each Director were: 

Board of Directors 

Audit and Risk Committee 

People and Culture Committee 

Eligible to 

attend 

Eligible to 

attend 

Attended 

Attended 

Attended 

Eligible to 

attend 

2 

2 

2 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2 

2 

2 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2 

2 

2 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Directors’ Report 

Directors’ Meetings 

J MacKenzie6

M Howes3

E Rubin4

H Stephens8

N Stoesser7

J Walters5

J Skippen1

T Brown1

A Grech2

J Millar1

8 

8 

5 

8 

8 

5 

11

11

10

11

8 

8 

5 

8 

7 

5 

11

10

10

11

1 Ceased as Director on 22 December 2017

2 Ceased as Director on 6 December 2017

4 Commenced as Director on 6 March 2018

5 Commenced as Director on 6 March 2018

6 Commenced as Director on 22 December 2017

7 Commenced as Director on 22 December 2017

8 Commenced as Director on 6 December 2017

Directors’ Interests in Shares 

J MacKenzie 

M Howes

H Stephens

N Stoesser

E Rubin

J Walters

J Skippen

T Brown

A Grech

J Millar

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

12,526

1,000

66,307

2 

1 

2 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Directors’ Interest in Contracts 

Directors’ interests in contracts are disclosed in Note 6.1 to the financial statements.

Auditor’s Independence Declaration 

to the audit for the financial year is provided with this report.

Proceedings on behalf of the Company 

A copy of the auditor’s independence declaration as required under section 307C of the Corporations Act 2001 in relation 

No person has applied to the Court under section 237 of the Corporations Act 2001 for leave to bring proceedings on 

behalf of the Company, or to intervene in any proceedings to which the Company is a party, for the purpose of taking 

responsibility on behalf of the Company for all or part of those proceedings.

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 8 

Slater & Gordon Limited

17

Page 9 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report 

1.0  Introduction  

FY18 has been a year of renewal for Slater and Gordon. The results show progress has been made, however this year 
the Company did not meet its financial targets.  As a result, Non-Executive Directors (NEDs) and Executive KMP did not 
receive remuneration increases or Short Term Incentive Plan payments. Despite the challenges of the past year, the 
Board, management and employees remain committed, optimistic and focused on the long term sustainable success of 
the Company.

The new Board and management reviewed and will continue to review the remuneration structure to ensure it closely 
aligns the interests of management with those of our clients, employees and shareholders, while also allowing Slater and 
Gordon to attract and retain key people who are central to business stability and success.

Changes to Remuneration 

During FY18 the Company made changes to the Short Term Incentive Plan. Gateways were introduced to baseline 
performance and behaviours for participants. The change provides stronger linkages between individual and company 
performance and reward outcomes.

Long Term Incentives (“LTI”) were not offered in FY18. The Company is currently designing a new Long Term Incentive 
Plan to further provide a direct link between the interests of the participants, shareholders and the long-term success of 
the Company. Further information on the proposed plan will be provided in the FY19 Remuneration Report.

Changes to Remuneration Report 

The Company continues its commitment to providing transparency to employees, clients and shareholders on how NEDs
and Executive KMP are remunerated. The Company has made changes to the FY18 Remuneration Report to simplify 
and improve the overall format and flow of information.

18

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 10

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report 

1.0  Introduction  

FY18 has been a year of renewal for Slater and Gordon. The results show progress has been made, however this year 

the Company did not meet its financial targets.  As a result, Non-Executive Directors (NEDs) and Executive KMP did not 

receive remuneration increases or Short Term Incentive Plan payments. Despite the challenges of the past year, the 

Board, management and employees remain committed, optimistic and focused on the long term sustainable success of 

the Company.

The new Board and management reviewed and will continue to review the remuneration structure to ensure it closely 

aligns the interests of management with those of our clients, employees and shareholders, while also allowing Slater and 

Gordon to attract and retain key people who are central to business stability and success.

Changes to Remuneration 

During FY18 the Company made changes to the Short Term Incentive Plan. Gateways were introduced to baseline 

performance and behaviours for participants. The change provides stronger linkages between individual and company 

performance and reward outcomes.

Long Term Incentives (“LTI”) were not offered in FY18. The Company is currently designing a new Long Term Incentive 

Plan to further provide a direct link between the interests of the participants, shareholders and the long-term success of 

the Company. Further information on the proposed plan will be provided in the FY19 Remuneration Report.

Changes to Remuneration Report 

The Company continues its commitment to providing transparency to employees, clients and shareholders on how NEDs

and Executive KMP are remunerated. The Company has made changes to the FY18 Remuneration Report to simplify 

and improve the overall format and flow of information.

Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

2.0  Remuneration Report Overview 

The  Directors  present  the  Remuneration  Report  (the  Report)  for  the Company  and  its  controlled  entities  for  FY18.
This Report  forms  part  of  the  Directors'  Report  and  has  been  audited  in  accordance  with  section  300A  of  the 
Corporations Act 2001. The  Report  details  the  remuneration  arrangements  for  Slater  and  Gordon’s  Key  Management 
Personnel (KMP): 

•
•

Non-Executive Directors (NEDs)
Executive KMP

KMP are those persons who, directly or indirectly, have authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling 
the major activities of the Company. The table below outlines the KMP and their movements during FY18:

Name 

Title 

Non-Executive Directors

James MacKenzie

• Chair of the Board
• Non-Executive Director

Merrick Howes

• Non-Executive Director

Elana Rubin

• Non-Executive Director

Hayden Stephens

• Non-Executive Director

Nils Stoesser

• Non-Executive Director

Jacqui Walters

• Non-Executive Director

John Skippen

• Chair of the Board

Tom (Thomas) Brown

• Non-Executive Director

Andrew Grech

• Non-Executive Director

James M. Millar

• Non-Executive Director

Other Executive KMP

John Somerville

• Chief Executive Officer

Belinda Nucifora

• Chief Financial Officer

Ken Fowlie

• Chief Executive Officer, UK

Bryce Houghton

• Group Chief Financial Officer

Change during FY18 

Became Chair and Non-Executive Director on
22 December 2017

Became a Non-Executive Director on 22
December 2017

Became a Non-Executive Director on 6 March
2018

Became Director on 6 December 2017
Ceased as Chief Executive Office on 7
February 2018
Commenced as Non-Executive Director on
same date

Became a Non-Executive Director on 22
December 2017

Became a Non-Executive Director on 6 March
2018

Ceased as Chair and Non-Executive Director
on 22 December 2017

Ceased as a Non-Executive Director on 22
December 2017

Ceased as a Non-Executive Director on 6
December 2017

Ceased as a Non-Executive Director on 22
December 2017

Became Chief Executive Officer on 7 February
2018

Became Chief Financial Officer on 2 October
2017

Ceased as an employee of the Company on 15
December 2017

Ceased as Group Chief Financial Officer on 31
August 2017

•

•

•

•
•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 10

Slater & Gordon Limited 

19

Page 11

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

3.0 How remuneration is governed 

The People and Culture Committee (formerly known as the Remuneration Committee) assists the Board to oversee the 
establishment and operation of appropriate policies and strategies that provide the Company with the capability to
achieve its short and long-term business objectives, including recommending remuneration changes to the Board for
NEDs and Executive KMP. 

3.1 

Use of remuneration advisors 

During FY18, the Company did not use remuneration advisors as defined under the Corporations Act 2001.

3.2 

Clawback of remuneration 

The clawback policy was introduced in June 2016. This policy enables Slater and Gordon to claw back certain elements 
of an Executive KMP’s remuneration if there has been a misstatement of the financial statements that resulted in the
Executive KMP receiving a reward which exceeds the outcome which would have been achieved had the misstatement
not been made. The clawback provisions are designed to further align the interests of the Executive KMP with the long-
term interests of the Company and to ensure excessive risk-taking is not rewarded.

3.3 

Share Trading Policy 

The Company’s Share Trading Policy (the “Policy”) applies to all Directors, officers, employees, contractors and
consultants of Slater and Gordon. The Share Trading Policy outlines how and when Directors, officers, employees,
contractors and consultants may deal in Slater and Gordon securities.  

If a Director or Executive KMP acquires securities in the Company, they should not sell or agree to sell any Slater and
Gordon securities of that class for at least 30 days.

Directors are prohibited from entering margin loans under the Company’s Share Trading Policy. Relevant Persons (as
defined in the Policy) require prior approval to enter into a margin loan arrangement where the amount of shares
mortgaged, provided as security, lent or charged to a financier, amounts to 1% or more of the issued capital in the 
Company at the relevant time. A Relevant Person must notify the Company Secretary immediately if they are given 
notice by their financier of an intention to make a margin call and sell the Company’s securities during a prohibited 
trading period.

Relevant Persons must not enter into hedging arrangements in relation to securities in the Company that are unvested or
subject to disposal restrictions or minimum shareholding requirements.

The Company’s Share Trading Policy is available on the Slater and Gordon website www.slatergordon.com.au.

20

Slater & Gordon Limited 

Page 12

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

3.0 How remuneration is governed 

The People and Culture Committee (formerly known as the Remuneration Committee) assists the Board to oversee the 

establishment and operation of appropriate policies and strategies that provide the Company with the capability to

achieve its short and long-term business objectives, including recommending remuneration changes to the Board for

NEDs and Executive KMP. 

3.1 

Use of remuneration advisors 

3.2 

Clawback of remuneration 

During FY18, the Company did not use remuneration advisors as defined under the Corporations Act 2001.

The clawback policy was introduced in June 2016. This policy enables Slater and Gordon to claw back certain elements 

of an Executive KMP’s remuneration if there has been a misstatement of the financial statements that resulted in the

Executive KMP receiving a reward which exceeds the outcome which would have been achieved had the misstatement

not been made. The clawback provisions are designed to further align the interests of the Executive KMP with the long-

term interests of the Company and to ensure excessive risk-taking is not rewarded.

3.3 

Share Trading Policy 

The Company’s Share Trading Policy (the “Policy”) applies to all Directors, officers, employees, contractors and

consultants of Slater and Gordon. The Share Trading Policy outlines how and when Directors, officers, employees,

contractors and consultants may deal in Slater and Gordon securities.  

If a Director or Executive KMP acquires securities in the Company, they should not sell or agree to sell any Slater and

Gordon securities of that class for at least 30 days.

Directors are prohibited from entering margin loans under the Company’s Share Trading Policy. Relevant Persons (as

defined in the Policy) require prior approval to enter into a margin loan arrangement where the amount of shares

mortgaged, provided as security, lent or charged to a financier, amounts to 1% or more of the issued capital in the 

Company at the relevant time. A Relevant Person must notify the Company Secretary immediately if they are given 

notice by their financier of an intention to make a margin call and sell the Company’s securities during a prohibited 

trading period.

Relevant Persons must not enter into hedging arrangements in relation to securities in the Company that are unvested or

subject to disposal restrictions or minimum shareholding requirements.

The Company’s Share Trading Policy is available on the Slater and Gordon website www.slatergordon.com.au.

Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

3.4 

Executive KMP employment agreements 

The following sets out details of the employment agreements relating to Executive KMP: 

Length of Contract

Executive KMP are on rolling contracts, which are ongoing employment 
contracts until notice is given by either party.

Resignation

Termination for 
cause

Termination in 
case of 
retirement, 
redundancy or 
notice without 
cause 

Termination 
payment 

CEO notice period 

Six (6) months

None

Six (6) months

Six (6) months

CFO notice period

Six (6) months

None

Six (6) months

Six (6) months

Statutory
Entitlements
Post-Employment
Restraints

Payment of statutory entitlements of long service leave and annual leave 
applies in all events of separation.
The employment agreement contains a restraint of trade provision which 
applies for a period of 9 months and 12 months.

3.5 

Cessation and movement of Executive KMP 

Cessation of Chief Executive Officer, Australia  
As disclosed to the ASX on 7 February 2018, Hayden Stephens resigned as Chief Executive Officer. 

The following arrangements applied to Mr. Stephens:

• Mr. Stephens remained on the Board as a Non-Executive Director.
• Mr. Stephens does not receive a Board director fee, but he continued to receive his CEO remuneration during

•

his notice period as part of his termination arrangements.
He received no STI and long-term incentive payments for FY18. He received $52,500 relating to FY17 that was
paid in the FY18 year.

Cessation of Group Chief Financial Officer 
As disclosed to the ASX on 31 August 2017, and in relation to the Recapitalisation and the stated intention to separate 
the UK and Australian operations, the Company no longer required the Group Financial Officer role post scheme 
implementation.  Consequently, the Board agreed with the Group Chief Financial Officer, Bryce Houghton, that he would 
step down from his role. Mr. Houghton ceased in a KMP role on 31 August 2017 and formally ceased employment from 
15 November 2017. 

In accordance with Mr. Houghton’s contract of employment, he received the following upon cessation of employment:

•
•

Six months’ salary in lieu of notice; and
Untaken annual leave accrued to the employment Termination Date, all less applicable tax.

He received no STI and long-term incentive payments for FY18 year.

Cessation of Chief Executive Officer, UK  
Ken Fowlie ceased as an employee of the Company on 15 December 2017 as a result of the Recapitalisation and 
separation of the UK and Australian operations.

Mr. Fowlie’s employment continues as an employee of the UK operations and therefore no separation payments were 
made.

3.6  Other transactions and balances with KMP and their related parties

During the year, the Group paid consulting fees to JACM Pty Ltd, of which James MacKenzie (Chair) is a Principal. The 
amount of $62,500 was paid to JACM Pty Ltd for consulting services prior to December 2017 and was approved by the 
Board. 

Slater & Gordon Limited 

Page 12

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 13

21

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

4.0  Overview of Executive KMP Remuneration 

This section of the Remuneration Report outlines the principles applied to Executive KMP remuneration decisions and 
the  framework  used  to  deliver  the  various  components  of  remuneration,  including  explanation  of  the  performance  and 
remuneration linkages.

4.1 

How Executive KMP remuneration policies and structures are determined 

Slater and Gordon’s remuneration strategy aligns the interests of the executives with those of clients, employees and 
shareholders.  It is designed to be simple and easy to understand, to reward actual achievement and to drive the long-
term, sustainable success of the Company. The performance of the Company is considered in the overall remuneration 
determinations for Executive KMP.

Slater and Gordon applies a robust and disciplined set of guiding principles to remuneration and reward that provides a 
level and mix of reward and recognition that:

o Will attract and retain employees with the requisite skills and expertise, and motivate high performance;

o Links company and individual performance;

o Maintains the integrity of the Company’s remuneration principles, strategies and practices;

o Provides a framework for undertaking reviews of remuneration proposals;

o Is compliant with current governance and legislative requirements related to remuneration practices; and

o Aligns the interests of shareholders and employees to enhance the Company’s performance in a

manner that supports the long-term financial soundness of the Company.

4.2 

Slater and Gordon’s Executive KMP Remuneration Structures 

Slater and Gordon rewards Executive KMP with a level and mix of remuneration appropriate to their position, 
responsibilities and performance, in a way that aligns with the business strategy and future success of the Company.

Executive KMP receive fixed remuneration and variable remuneration consisting of short and long-term incentive 
opportunities.  Executive KMP remuneration levels are reviewed annually by the People and Culture Committee with 
reference to the remuneration guiding principles and market movements.

4.3 

Elements of remuneration 

Fixed remuneration 
Fixed remuneration is set to attract, retain and reflect the scope, contribution, skills, capability and experience of the 
individual.  Fixed remuneration consists of base salary, superannuation (statutory guarantee) and other non-monetary 
benefits.

Fixed remuneration is reviewed annually with approved changes effective 1 July. The following factors are taken into 
consideration when reviewing executive remuneration:

•
•
•
•

Business performance
Individual performance
Economic climate
External market data

Adjustments to Executive KMP remuneration are reviewed by the People and Culture Committee and approved by the 
Board.

22

Slater & Gordon Limited 

Page 14

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

4.0  Overview of Executive KMP Remuneration 

This section of the Remuneration Report outlines the principles applied to Executive KMP remuneration decisions and 

the  framework  used  to  deliver  the  various  components  of  remuneration,  including  explanation  of  the  performance  and 

remuneration linkages.

4.1 

How Executive KMP remuneration policies and structures are determined 

Slater and Gordon’s remuneration strategy aligns the interests of the executives with those of clients, employees and 

shareholders.  It is designed to be simple and easy to understand, to reward actual achievement and to drive the long-

term, sustainable success of the Company. The performance of the Company is considered in the overall remuneration 

determinations for Executive KMP.

Slater and Gordon applies a robust and disciplined set of guiding principles to remuneration and reward that provides a 

level and mix of reward and recognition that:

o Will attract and retain employees with the requisite skills and expertise, and motivate high performance;

o Links company and individual performance;

o Maintains the integrity of the Company’s remuneration principles, strategies and practices;

o Provides a framework for undertaking reviews of remuneration proposals;

o Is compliant with current governance and legislative requirements related to remuneration practices; and

o Aligns the interests of shareholders and employees to enhance the Company’s performance in a

manner that supports the long-term financial soundness of the Company.

4.2 

Slater and Gordon’s Executive KMP Remuneration Structures 

Slater and Gordon rewards Executive KMP with a level and mix of remuneration appropriate to their position, 

responsibilities and performance, in a way that aligns with the business strategy and future success of the Company.

Executive KMP receive fixed remuneration and variable remuneration consisting of short and long-term incentive 

opportunities.  Executive KMP remuneration levels are reviewed annually by the People and Culture Committee with 

reference to the remuneration guiding principles and market movements.

Fixed remuneration is set to attract, retain and reflect the scope, contribution, skills, capability and experience of the 

individual.  Fixed remuneration consists of base salary, superannuation (statutory guarantee) and other non-monetary 

Fixed remuneration is reviewed annually with approved changes effective 1 July. The following factors are taken into 

consideration when reviewing executive remuneration:

4.3 

Elements of remuneration 

Fixed remuneration 

benefits.

Board.

•

•

•

•

Business performance

Individual performance

Economic climate

External market data

Adjustments to Executive KMP remuneration are reviewed by the People and Culture Committee and approved by the 

Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

4.3      Elements of remuneration (continued) 

Short Term Incentive (STI) 
STI is designed to provide a tangible link between the interests of the Executive KMP and the financial performance of 
the Company. Under the STI Plan, all Executive KMPs have the opportunity to earn an annual incentive award which
is delivered in cash. 

How is it paid? 
STI is delivered in cash.

How much can executives earn? 
The Company sets STI opportunities annually in the form of an STI cap. STI cap is represented in fixed dollar amounts
and not percentages of base salaries.

STI cap - up to 40% of STI cap for on target performance with a maximum stretch opportunity of 100% of STI cap.
Individual STI targets for FY18*:

Executive

STI Amount

STI Type

John Somerville
Belinda Nucifora

$264,734
$215,000

cap
cap

% of Base 
Salary
50%
50%

*Hayden Stephens forfeited STI upon resignation from the role of CEO Australia. Bryce Houghton and Ken Fowlie were not invited to participate in FY18 
STI program.

Total Remuneration % (annualised at target) for FY18

Executive

John Somerville
Belinda Nucifora

Total Fixed 
Remuneration
67.5%
67.7%

Short Term 
Incentive
32.5%
32.3%

In addition to STI targets, the Board may determine from time to time to award a performance or discretionary bonus
to Executive KMP. Incentives are aligned to key financial targets being exceeded.

How is performance measured? 
Executive KMPs have company and individual Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). Assessment of performance 
measures is completed after the announcement of financial statements.  Performance measures are validated and 
approved by the Board.

FY18 measures are set out below:

Executive KMP

Financial 

EBITDA 

100%

Non-Financial 
Business unit 
KPIs 
0%

The non-financial measures in the STI plan are:
•
•

leading transformation initiatives
People as measured by the Company’s values and behaviours

Who sets STI performance measures? 
Financial performance measures are set by the Board, based on the recommendation of the People and Culture 
Committee. 

Individual KPIs are set for Executive KMP (CFO) by the CEO, then reviewed and endorsed by the People and Culture 
Committee and Board. 

CEO individual and financial KPIs are set and approved by the Board.

When is it paid? 
The STI outcome is determined after the end of the financial year and after announcement of financial statements.  The 
Board approves the final STI award for the Executive KMP, which is paid approximately three months after the end of the 
performance period.  There are no deferral components.

Slater & Gordon Limited 

Page 14

Slater & Gordon Limited 

23

Page 15

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

4.3      Elements of remuneration (continued) 

What happens if an Executive KMP leaves? 
The following details the treatment of STIs on termination: 

Resignation: Any potential STI payment is forfeited if an employee tenders their resignation. If an employee has given 
notice, but not actually ceased employment, their unpaid incentives are forfeited irrespective of when the performance 
period ended.

Dismissal: Any potential STI payment is forfeited if an employee is given notice of dismissal.

Death: Payments will be made to the estate of a deceased employee pro-rated for the eligible period. Payment will be 
calculated in accordance with the normal timetable and based on the end of year results.

Total & Permanent Incapacity: Employees will be eligible for payments pro-rated for the eligible period. Payment will be 
calculated in accordance with the normal timetable and based on the end of year results.

Retrenchment or other Company initiated termination: At the discretion of the Board.

Long Term Incentive (LTI) 
LTI is intended to provide a direct link between the interests of the executive KMP and the long-term success of the 
Company. It is also used as an incentive to reward and retain key talent.

LTIs were not offered in FY18 given the financial position of the Company. The Company is currently designing a new 
LTI Plan to further provide a direct link between the interests of the participants, shareholders and the long-term success 
of the Company. Further information on the proposed plan will be outlined in the FY19 Remuneration Report.

4.4 

Changes for FY18 

Further simplifications were made to the STI Plan for FY18 to structure the plan in two parts:

Gateway: Employees are allocated to participant groups with baseline performance gateways set for each group.  
Importantly, all participants must demonstrate behaviors consistent with Slater and Gordon values and meet 
expectations in client service.  Once the gateway is met, participants become eligible to be considered for an STI 
payment.

STI Payment: Delivery against individual KPIs. 

24

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 16

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

4.3      Elements of remuneration (continued) 

What happens if an Executive KMP leaves? 

The following details the treatment of STIs on termination: 

Resignation: Any potential STI payment is forfeited if an employee tenders their resignation. If an employee has given 

notice, but not actually ceased employment, their unpaid incentives are forfeited irrespective of when the performance 

period ended.

Dismissal: Any potential STI payment is forfeited if an employee is given notice of dismissal.

Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

5.0  FY18 Executive KMP Performance and Remuneration Outcomes 

5.1 

Actual Remuneration earned by Executives KMP in FY18: 

The actual remuneration earned by Executive KMPs in FY18 is set out in section 7 below.

5.2 

STI Performance Measures for FY18 

Executive  KMP  were measured  on  the  achievement  of  budgeted  EBITDA.  Financial  performance  was  below  the 
threshold gateway and as a result, the STI award as a percentage of target was 0%.

Death: Payments will be made to the estate of a deceased employee pro-rated for the eligible period. Payment will be 

5.3 

Long Term Incentive Outcomes

calculated in accordance with the normal timetable and based on the end of year results.

Total & Permanent Incapacity: Employees will be eligible for payments pro-rated for the eligible period. Payment will be 

calculated in accordance with the normal timetable and based on the end of year results.

As disclosed in the FY17 Remuneration Report, Hayden Stephens and Ken Fowlie were participants of the FY15 LTI. 
Both tranches were assessed by the Board in September 2017, neither performance hurdle was achieved and all 
Performance Rights were forfeited. 

Retrenchment or other Company initiated termination: At the discretion of the Board.

5.4  Overview of company performance (FY14 to FY18) 

The table below sets out information about the Company’s earnings and movements in shareholder wealth for the past 
five years up to and including the current financial year.

Company Performance 
Revenue ($'000)
Profit before tax ($'000)

Profit after tax ($'000)
Basic earnings per share 
(cents)(4)
Diluted earnings per share 
(cents)(4)
EBITDAW(5)

Gross Operating Cash Flow less 
CAPEX 

Dividends per share - paid during 
financial year (cents)

Total dividends paid during 
financial year (cents)

Share price at 30 June ($)(1)
(1)

2014 
Restated(2) 

2015 
Restated(2) 

2016(2) 

2017(2) 

2018(3) 

438,228
95,747

68,236

598,185
85,408

62,374

908,185
(1,029,468)

(1,017,595)

611,485
(551,149)

(546,831)

160,276
(29,238)

(31,916)

3,376.20

2,643.03

(28,877.5)

(15,542.5)

(0.843) 

3,316.27

2,624.05

(28,877.5)

(15,542.5)

(0.843) 

63,321

62,615

92,586

33,666

49,343

(76,095)

(6,369)

(96,383)

(34,308)

(876)

6.85

8.50

5.50

13,770

515.42

17,620

355.60

19,330

38.96

-

-

-

-

8.09

1.92

Share price stated as at 30 June. As 30 June 2018 was a Saturday, the share price stated in 2018 was as at 29 June 2018. All prior year share 
prices were restated for the impact of the 100 to 1 share consolidation that took place on 8 December 2017.
Financial performances were not restated for the discontinued operations that occurred in FY2018. However, the basic earnings per share, diluted 
earnings per share and share price at 30 June have been restated for the 100 to 1 share consolidation that took place on 8 December 2017.
2018 profit before tax, profit after tax and EBITDAW from continuing operations.
Basic earnings per share (cents) and diluted earnings per share (cents) were restated for the impact of the 100 to 1 share consolidation that took
place on 8 December 2017. 2018 earnings per share is shown excluding discontinued operations. Prior years are shown for the overall business and 
have not been restated for discontinued operations.
EBITDAW is defined as Earnings before net interest, taxes, depreciation, amortisation, impairment and movement in WIP.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Long Term Incentive (LTI) 

LTI is intended to provide a direct link between the interests of the executive KMP and the long-term success of the 

Company. It is also used as an incentive to reward and retain key talent.

LTIs were not offered in FY18 given the financial position of the Company. The Company is currently designing a new 

LTI Plan to further provide a direct link between the interests of the participants, shareholders and the long-term success 

of the Company. Further information on the proposed plan will be outlined in the FY19 Remuneration Report.

4.4 

Changes for FY18 

Further simplifications were made to the STI Plan for FY18 to structure the plan in two parts:

Gateway: Employees are allocated to participant groups with baseline performance gateways set for each group.  

Importantly, all participants must demonstrate behaviors consistent with Slater and Gordon values and meet 

expectations in client service.  Once the gateway is met, participants become eligible to be considered for an STI 

payment.

STI Payment: Delivery against individual KPIs. 

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 16

Slater & Gordon Limited

25

Page 17

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

6.0  Overview of Non-Executive Director remuneration

6.1  Overview of Non-Executive Director remuneration 

Slater and Gordon NED fees are designed to attract and retain high calibre directors who can discharge their roles and
responsibilities as required in terms of good governance, strong oversight, independence and objectivity.

NED remuneration is based on fixed director fees and superannuation contributions. The chair of the Board attends all
committee meetings but does not receive any additional committee fees in addition to base fees.

The People and Culture Committee reviews NED remuneration annually against comparable companies. In determining 
the level of fees, independent survey data on comparable companies (ASX listed companies if a similar size) was
purchased at the time of the review.

6.2  Maximum aggregate NED fee pool 

The maximum aggregate amount that may be paid to NEDs for their services is $950,000 during any financial year, as
approved by shareholders at the 2015 AGM held in November 2015. The Board will not seek an increase to the 
aggregate NED fee pool limit at the 2018 AGM.

The table below summarises Board and Committee fees paid to NEDs for FY18 (inclusive of superannuation).
After the appointment of the new Board on 22 December 2017, Slater and Gordon made changes to NED Fees whereby
Board Director fees where changed to be inclusive of additional duties including membership and Chairing of Board 
committees.

Board Chair Fee 

Board Director Fee 

Committee Fees 

Audit, Compliance & Risk 

Nomination Committee(3) 

People and Culture 
Committee(4) 

22 December 2017 –

1 July 2017 – 

30 June 2018 

21 December 2017 

$240,000(1)

$175,000(2)

$240,000(1)

$120,000

Chair

Member

Chair

Member

Chair 

Member 

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

$20,000

$5,000

Nil

$5,000

$10,000

$5,000

Annual Fee Pool 

$950,000

$950,000

(1) Committee fees are not paid to the Chair of the Board.
(2) Non-Executive Directors Merrick Howes and Nils Stoesser do not receive payment of Board director fees from the Company. In place of Board director 
fee, Non-Executive Director Hayden Stephens transitioned from Chief Executive Officer Australia to a Non-Executive Director on 7 February 2018. He does 
not receive a Board director’s fee. He continued to receive his CEO remuneration during his notice period as part of his termination arrangements. This
remuneration does not count towards the total NED Annual Fee Pool. 
(3) The Nomination Committee was suspended and did not meet during FY18. There is no intention to bring the Committee out of suspension in FY19.
(4) Formerly known as the Remuneration Committee.

26

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 18

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

6.0  Overview of Non-Executive Director remuneration

6.1  Overview of Non-Executive Director remuneration 

Slater and Gordon NED fees are designed to attract and retain high calibre directors who can discharge their roles and

responsibilities as required in terms of good governance, strong oversight, independence and objectivity.

NED remuneration is based on fixed director fees and superannuation contributions. The chair of the Board attends all

committee meetings but does not receive any additional committee fees in addition to base fees.

The People and Culture Committee reviews NED remuneration annually against comparable companies. In determining 

the level of fees, independent survey data on comparable companies (ASX listed companies if a similar size) was

purchased at the time of the review.

6.2  Maximum aggregate NED fee pool 

The maximum aggregate amount that may be paid to NEDs for their services is $950,000 during any financial year, as

approved by shareholders at the 2015 AGM held in November 2015. The Board will not seek an increase to the 

aggregate NED fee pool limit at the 2018 AGM.

The table below summarises Board and Committee fees paid to NEDs for FY18 (inclusive of superannuation).

After the appointment of the new Board on 22 December 2017, Slater and Gordon made changes to NED Fees whereby

Board Director fees where changed to be inclusive of additional duties including membership and Chairing of Board 

committees.

Board Chair Fee 

Board Director Fee 

Committee Fees 

Audit, Compliance & Risk 

Nomination Committee(3) 

People and Culture 

Committee(4) 

22 December 2017 –

1 July 2017 – 

30 June 2018 

21 December 2017 

$240,000(1)

$175,000(2)

$240,000(1)

$120,000

Chair

Member

Chair

Member

Chair 

Member 

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

$20,000

$5,000

Nil

$5,000

$10,000

$5,000

Annual Fee Pool 

$950,000

$950,000

(1) Committee fees are not paid to the Chair of the Board.

(2) Non-Executive Directors Merrick Howes and Nils Stoesser do not receive payment of Board director fees from the Company. In place of Board director 

fee, Non-Executive Director Hayden Stephens transitioned from Chief Executive Officer Australia to a Non-Executive Director on 7 February 2018. He does 

not receive a Board director’s fee. He continued to receive his CEO remuneration during his notice period as part of his termination arrangements. This

remuneration does not count towards the total NED Annual Fee Pool. 

(3) The Nomination Committee was suspended and did not meet during FY18. There is no intention to bring the Committee out of suspension in FY19.

(4) Formerly known as the Remuneration Committee.

Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

6.3 

FY18 Non-Executive Director Remuneration 

The table below includes entries for short term benefits to Merrick Howes and Nils Stoesser, executives employed by 
Anchorage Capital Group LLC. The Company does not pay any remuneration to Merrick Howes or Nils Stoesser.
Australian Accounting Standards require disclosure of fees for their roles as Directors of the Company, where they are
paid by their employer, which is the parent entity of the Group. The fees paid by the Company to other Directors were
considered to be representative of this.

Amounts $ 

Current NEDs 
James MacKenzie (Chair) (1)

Merrick Howes (2)

Disclosure required by Australian Accounting Standards – no remuneration was actually paid by the Company

Nils Stoesser (2)

Disclosure required by Australian Accounting Standards – no remuneration was actually paid by the Company

Hayden Stephens (3)

Elana Rubin (4)

Jacqui Walters (4)

Former NEDs 

John Skippen (Chair) (5)

Ian Court (8)

Erica Lane (8)

Rhonda O’Donnell (9)

James Millar (6)

Thomas Brown (6)

Andrew Grech (7)

Total(11)

Short-term 
benefits 

Year 

Fees(10) 

Post-employment 
benefits 
Superannuation 
benefits 

Total 

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

FY18 

FY17

 120,282 

-

 82,442 

-

 82,442 

-

- 

-

 51,633 

-

 51,633 

-

 164,963 

220,384 

-

48,272 

-

61,644 

-

80,611 

 104,320 

134,151 

 95,890 

102,248

 243,552 

 -   

 997,157 

647,310 

 10,487 

 130,769 

-

-

-

-

-

- 

-

-

82,442

-

82,442

-

- 

-

 4,905 

 56,538 

-

-

 4,905 

 56,538 

-

-

 10,410 

19,616 

-

 175,373 

240,000 

-

19,497 

67,769 

-

-

5,856 

67,500 

-

-

7,658 

88,269 

 8,666 

 112,986 

12,580 

146,731 

 8,282 

 104,172 

9,714

 9,253 

111,962

 252,805 

-   

 -   

 56,908 

 1,054,065 

74,921 

722,231 

(1)

J MacKenzie commenced as Chair and Non-Executive Director on 22 December 2017.

(2) M Howes and N Stoesser commenced as Non-Executive Directors on 22 December 2017 and are not remunerated by the Company for their services as Non-Executive Directors. The Company was not charged for their

services. Amounts included in the table are not included in the total NED Annual Fee Pool.

(3)

H Stephens transitioned from Chief Executive Officer Australia to a Non-Executive Director on 7 February 2018. He does not receive a Board director’s fee. He continued to receive his CEO remuneration during his 

notice period as part of his termination arrangements. This remuneration does not count towards the total NED Annual Fee Pool. Please refer to table 7.1 KMP Remuneration: Statutory Remuneration Outcomes for H 

Stephens' remuneration.

E Rubin and J Walters commenced as Non-Executive Directors on 6 March 2018.

J Skippen ceased as Chair and Non-Executive Director on 22 December 2017.

T Brown and J Millar ceased as Non-Executive Directors on 22 December 2017.

A Grech ceased as Group Managing Director on 29 June 2017 and continued as Non-Executive Director of the company until 6 December 2017. The FY17 disclosures represent his remuneration as Group Managing 

Director of the Company, which was disclosed under Executive Remuneration Table in prior year. The FY18 disclosures reflect the remuneration received as Non-Executive Director.

I Court and E Lane ceased as Non-Executive Directors on 30 August 2016.

R O'Donnell ceased as a Non-Executive Director on 27 February 2017.

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10) The Fees remunerated includes Non-Executive Director fees and end of contract notice period fees, unless otherwise specified under each of the Non-Executive Directors' notes.

(11) The fees shown attributable to M Howes and N Stoesser are not counted towards the maximum aggregate NED fee pool.

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 18

Slater & Gordon Limited

27

Page 19

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018l

a
t
o
T
f
o
n
o
i
t
r
o
p
o
r
P

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R

%
0

.

0

%
0

.

0

%
0

.

0

%
0

.

0

%
0

.

0

%
2

.

1

%
0

.

0

y
t
i
u
q
e

s
a

d
e
r
e
v

i
l

e
D

-

m
r
o
f
r
e
P

e
c
n
a

d
e
t
a
e
r

l

l

a
t
o
T

-
n
u
m
e
R

n
o
i
t
a
r
e

%
0

.

0

5
3
3
0
2
2

,

%
0

.

0

%
0

.

0

%
0

.

0

%
0

.

0

%
2

.

1

%
0

.

0

-

-

4
5
0
2
2
4

,

4
8
3
4
5
2

,

3
8
1
9
5
5

,

7
8
7
0
8
4

,

%
9

.

3
5

%
8

.

9
5

%
0

.

0

%
3

.

1

%
0

.

0

)

%
9

.

1
(

%
0

.

0

%
7

.

0
2

%
3

.

7

%
3

.

1

%
0

.

0

)

%
9

.

1
(

%
4

.

2

%
0

.

3
2

-

1
2
7
1
2
7

,

1
6
3
3
3
5

,

,

8
1
0
9
5
6
1

,

,

5
2
6
0
0
5
1

,

,

1
8
2
9
9
0
2

,

,

7
8
1
2
5
2
4

,

i

e
c
v
r
e
S

f
o
d
n
E

y
a
p
e
l
b
a
i
r
a
V

l

a
t
o
T

u
t
c
a
r
t
n
o
C

e
c

i
t
o
N

l

a

d
o
i
r
e
P

d
e
s
u
n
U

y
r
o
t
u
t
a
t
S

e
v
a
e
L

s
e
c
n
a

l

a
B

l

a
t
o
T

-
g
n
o
L

m
r
e
t

-

m
r
o
f
r
e
P

e
c
n
a

/
s
t
h
g
R

i

s
n
o
i
t
p
O

-
t
r
o
h
S

m
r
e
t

h
s
a
C

s
u
n
o
B

l
a
t
o
T

g
n
o
L

e
c
i
v
r
e
s

e
v
a
e
l

-
r
e
p
u
S

n
o
i
t
a
u
n
n
a

s
t
i
f
e
n
e
b

r
e
h
t
O

s
t
i
f
e
n
e
b

-
n
o
N

y
r
a
t
e
n
o
m

s
t
i
f
e
n
e
b

-
t
s
o
P

e
m
y
o
p
m
e

l

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R
d
e
x
i
F

m
r
e
t
-
g
n
o
L

t
n

m
r
e
t
-
t
r
o
h
S

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2
5
9
6

,

2
5
9
,
6

2
9
5
6
5
3

,

6
7
9
4
1
3

,

6
1
6
1
4

,

-

-

-

-

-

-

-
-
-

-

-

-

-
-

-
-

-

-

-

-

-

-

- -

-

8
8
0
3
6
6

,

2
9
5
6
5
3

,

8
8
0
3
6
6

,

6
9
8
2
8
3

,

6
7
9
4
1
3

,

6
9
8
2
8
3

,

2
9
1
0
8
2

,

6
1
6
1
4

,

2
9
1
0
8
2

,

0
3
9
1
9
9

,

0
3
4
,
4
9
8

-

2
5
9
6

,

0
0
5
2
5

,

-

-

2
5
9
,
6

)
3
5
9
8
2
(

,

)
3
5
9
,
8
2
(

-

-

-

0
0
5
,
7
9

0
0
5
,
2
5

0
0
5
2
5

,

1
8
8
6
7
9

,

-

1
8
3
,
9
7
8

0
0
5
,
2
5

0
0
5
,
7
9

-

-

-

5
3
3
,
0
2
2

1
5
4
,
2

2
4
9
,
7

-

-

4
5
0
,
2
2
4

8
3
2
,
4

0
6
9
,
4
1

2
6
3
3
6

,

-

4
8
3
,
4
5
2

1
3
2
,
2
5
5

5
9
1
,
4
2
1

8
8
0
,
7
6
6

1
2
2
,
9
6
6

9
0
4
,
6
2
5

-

0
9
4
,
6
6
8

9
8
1
,
0
9
6
,
1

8
1
2
,
2
1
6
,
2

-

-

-

-

3
5
0
,
3
1

8
9
1
,
1
6

9
4
4
,
0
3

-

-

7
8
8
,
7
6

2
0
5
,
3
4

-

9
3
9
,
4

3
2
7
,
0
1

6
5
8
,
3

9
6
7
,
0
4

9
4
0
,
0
2

6
1
6
,
9
1

-

1
2
7
,
1
3

6
4
7
,
1
5

9
2
8
,
2
0
1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2
6
4
,
6
8
2

2
6
3
3
6

,

2
6
4
6
8
2

,

-

-

-

-

1
7
4
,
2

8
4
3
,
5

8
7
2
,
2

6
8
0
,
1
1

0
6
9
,
8

5
6
8
,
4
1

-

-

9
0
7
,
3
1

9
9
2
,
1
3

2
4
9
,
9
0
2

y
r
a
l
a
S

-

-

4
9
4
,
9
3
3

4
7
9
,
6
4
2

0
6
1
,
6
3
5

1
6
0
,
8
1
1

0
8
1
,
2
0
6

4
1
0
,
9
7
5

9
7
4
,
1
6
4

-

7
0
3
,
8
4
5

5
8
4
,
3
9
4
,
1

6
2
1
,
8
4
1
,
2

8
1
Y
F

r
a
e
Y

7
1
Y
F

8
1
Y
F

7
1
Y
F

e
m
a
N

e

l
l
i

v
r
e
m
o
S

n
h
o
J

)
1
(

)
2
(
a
r
o
f
i
c
u
N

a
d
n

i
l

e
B

P
M
K
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
E
r
e
m
r
o
F

8
1
Y
F

7
1
Y
F

8
1
Y
F

7
1
Y
F

8
1
Y
F

7
1
Y
F

8
1
Y
F

7
1
Y
F

8
1
Y
F

7
1
Y
F

)
4
(
n
o
t
h
g
u
o
H

e
c
y
r
B

)
5
(
s
n
e
h
p
e
t
S

n
e
d
y
a
H

)
3
(
e

i
l

w
o
F

n
e
K

w
e
r
d
n
A

)
6
(
h
c
e
r
G

l
a
t
o
T

l

a
t

o
T

i

n
o
p
u
m
h
o
t
d
a
p

i

s

i

i

h
c
h
w

t
n
e
m
y
a
p

n
o
i
t
a
n
m
r
e
t

i

i

s
h

s
t
n
e
s
e
r
p
e
r

t
i
f
e
n
e
b

i

e
c
v
r
e
S

f

o

d
n
E
e
h
T

.

7
1
0
2

r
e
b
m
e
v
o
N
5
1

n
o

p
u
o
r
G
e
h

t

d
e

t
r
a
p
e
d

d
n
a

7
1
0
2

t
s
u
g
u
A
1
3

n
o
r
e
c
i
f
f

O

l

i

a
c
n
a
n
F

i

i

f
e
h
C
p
u
o
r
G
s
a

d
e
s
a
e
c
n
o

t

h
g
u
o
H
B

.
7
1
0
2

r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
5
1

o

t

p
u

i

d
e
v
e
c
e
r

n
o

i
t

a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r

e
h

t

t
c
e

l
f

e
r

e
v
o
b
a

s

l
i

a

t

e
d

e
h
T

.

7
1
0
2

r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
5
1

n
o
y
n
a
p
m
o
C
e
h
t

f
o

t
r
a
p
e
b

o

t

d
e
s
a
e
c

e

i
l

w
o
F
K

2
5
9
6

.

1

:

f

o
P
B
G
o

t

D
U
A

f

o

e

t

a
r

e
g
n
a
h
c
x
e

e
g
a
r
e
v
a
n
a

i

g
n
s
u
D
U
A
o

t

d
e

t
r
e
v
n
o
c
n
e
e
b
s
a
h

i

h
c
h
w

,
g
n

i
l
r
e
t
S
d
n
u
o
P
n

i

i

d
a
p

s
a
w
e

i
l

w
o
F
K

.

8
1
0
2
y
r
a
u
r
b
e
F
7

n
o

r
e
c
i
f
f

O
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
E

i

f
e
h
C
s
a
d
e
c
n
e
m
m
o
c
e

l
l
i

v
r
e
m
o
S
J

.

7
1
0
2

r
e
b
o
t
c
O
2

n
o
r
e
c
i
f
f

O

l

i

a
c
n
a
n
F

i

i

f
e
h
C
s
a
d
e
c
n
e
m
m
o
c
a
r
o

f
i
c
u
N
B

.
d
o
i
r
e
p
e
c
i
t
o
n

i

s
h

i

g
n
d
u
c
n

l

i

e
m
o
c
n

i

r
a
e
y

l
l

u
f

e
h
t

t
c
e

l
f

e
r

e
v
o
b
a

s

l
i

t

a
e
d

e
h
T

.

8
1
0
2
y
r
a
u
r
b
e
F
7
n
o

r
o

t
c
e
r
i

D
e
v
i
t

u
c
e
x
E
-
n
o
N
o

t

a

i
l

a
r
t
s
u
A

r
e
c
i
f
f

O
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
E

i

f
e
h
C
m
o
r
f

d
e
n
o

i
t
i
s
n
a
r
t

s
n
e
h
p
e
S
H

t

.
y
n
a
p
m
o
C
e
h
t

f
o

r
e
c
i
f
f

O

l

i

a
c
n
a
n
F

i

i

f
e
h
C
p
u
o
r
G
s
a
n
o

i
t

a
s
s
e
c

3
.
6

l

e
b
a
T
r
e
d
n
u
d
e
s
o
c
s
d

i

l

n
e
e
b
s
a
h

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r
8
1
Y
F
s
h
c
e
r
G
A

'

.
7
1
0
2

r
e
b
m
e
c
e
D
6

l
i
t

n
u
y
n
a
p
m
o
c
e
h

t

f

o

r
o
t
c
e
r
i

D
e
v
i
t

u
c
e
x
E
-
n
o
N
s
a

d
e
u
n

i
t

n
o
c
d
n
a

7
1
0
2

e
n
u
J
9
2
n
o

r
o
t
c
e
r
i

i

D
g
n
g
a
n
a
M
p
u
o
r
G
s
a

d
e
s
a
e
c
h
c
e
r
G
A

)
1
(

)
2
(

)
3
(

)
4
(

)
5
(

)
6
(

l

.
e
b
a
T
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R

l

a
t
o
T
r
o
t
c
e
r
i

D
e
v
i
t

u
c
e
x
E
-
n
o
N

0
2

e
g
a
P

d
e
t
i

i

m
L
n
o
d
r
o
G
&

r
e
t
a
S

l

l

i

e
r
u
s
o
c
s
D
y
r
o
t
u
t
a
t
S
–
e
l
b
a
T
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R
P
M
K
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
E
1
.
7

)
d
e
u
n
i
t
n
o
c
(

t
r
o
p
e
R
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R
d
e
t
i
d
u
A

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
R
P
M
K
e
v
i
t
u
c
e
x
E

l
a
u
t
c
A

0
.
7

t
r
o
p
e
R

’
s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
D

28

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

7.2  Executive KMP Equity Plans 

As described in Section 5.3, the FY15 LTI plan is the only equity plan in which Executive KMP continued to participate 
during FY18. The FY15 LTI has two testing dates to determine if any performance rights may vest, being 30 June 2017 
for EPS, and 31 August 2017 of RTSR. Formal assessment of performance hurdles were assessed by the Board in 
September 2017. Neither performance hurdle was achieved and all Performance Rights were forfeited. 

7.3 Vesting and Exercise of Performance Rights granted as Remuneration  

During FY18, no performance rights or options were vested, exercised, or granted.

7.4  Shareholding of Executive KMP and NEDs 

In accordance with the Corporations Act (section 205G(1)), the Company is required to notify the interests (shares and
rights to shares) of directors to the ASX. In the interests of transparency and completeness of disclosure, this information 
is provided for each NED (as required under the Corporations Act) and all Executive KMP. Please refer section 3.3 for 
more information on prohibition on hedging and margin lending. 

The table below indicates shareholdings of the KMP:

Executive KMP 

Number held at 
1 July 2017 

James MacKenzie

Merrick Howes

Nils Stoesser

-

 -

 -

Impact of share 
consolidation 
and issuance(1) 
-

-

-

Hayden Stephens

4,804,115 

 (4,212,563)

Elana Rubin

Jacqui Walters

John Somerville

Belinda Nucifora

 -

-

 -

 -

-

-

-

-

Former Non-Executive Directors

John Skippen

James Millar

Andrew Grech

Ken Fowlie

Tom Brown

Bryce Houghton

100,000 

20,000 

 (99,000)

 (19,800)

7,000,656 

(6,930,649)

5,646,221 

(5,589,758)

-

-

-

-

Total 

 17,570,992 

 (16,851,770) 

Acquisitions 

Disposals 

Number held at 30 
June 2018 

-

 -

 -

-

 -

-

 -

 -

 -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-
(579,026)(2)

-

-

-

-

-

(200)

(3,700)

-

-

-

-

 -

 -

12,526 

 -

-

 -

 -

1,000 

 -

66,307 

56,463 

-

-

(582,926)

 136,296 

(1) Refers to the impacts of the 1 for 100 share consolidation and the issuance of a further 66,050,874 shares as part of the Senior Lender Scheme of Arrangement completed on 22 
December 2017.

(2) Represents 549,000 shares disposed on 11 September 2017 (pre-share consolidation) and 22,000 shares disposed on 8 March 2018, 8,026 shares disposed on 12 March 2018 
(post share consolidation)

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 21 

29

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

7.5  Movement in Executive KMP Holdings: Performance rights over ordinary shares 

During the financial year, the movement in the number and value of performance rights over ordinary shares of Slater
and Gordon Limited acquired under LTI, held by executive KMP is detailed below:

Number 
held at 
1 July 
2017 

Number 
offered in 
year 

Offer 
Value 

Number 
exercised 
in year 

Intrinsic 
Value ($) 

Number 
forfeited 
during 
year 

Number 
held at 30 
June 2018 

Intrinsic 
Value at 
30 June 
2018 ($) 

John Somerville

Belinda Nucifora

-

-

Former Executive KMP 

Andrew Grech

- 

Ken Fowlie

16,000 

Hayden Stephens

16,000 

Bryce Houghton

- 

Total

32,000 

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

16,000 

16,000 

- 

32,000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

End of Remuneration Report 

Slater & Gordon Limited

30

Page 22 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Directors’ Report 

Audited Remuneration Report (continued)

7.5  Movement in Executive KMP Holdings: Performance rights over ordinary shares 

During the financial year, the movement in the number and value of performance rights over ordinary shares of Slater

and Gordon Limited acquired under LTI, held by executive KMP is detailed below:

Number 

held at 

1 July 

2017 

Number 

offered in 

year 

Offer 

Value 

Number 

exercised 

Intrinsic 

Value ($) 

in year 

Number 

forfeited 

during 

year 

Number 

held at 30 

June 2018 

Intrinsic 

Value at 

30 June 

2018 ($) 

John Somerville

Belinda Nucifora

Former Executive KMP 

Andrew Grech

Ken Fowlie

16,000 

Hayden Stephens

16,000 

Bryce Houghton

Total

32,000 

-

-

- 

- 

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

-

-

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

16,000 

16,000 

32,000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Ernst & Young 
8 Exhibition Street  
Melbourne  VIC  3000  Australia 
GPO Box 67 Melbourne  VIC  3001 

Tel: +61 3 9288 8000 
Fax: +61 3 8650 7777 
ey.com/au 

Auditor’s Independence Declaration to the Directors of  
Slater and Gordon Limited 

As lead auditor for the audit of Slater and Gordon Limited and Controlled Entities for the financial year 
ended 30 June 2018, I declare to the best of my knowledge and belief, there have been: 

a)  no contraventions of the auditor independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 in 

relation to the audit; and   

b)  no contraventions of any applicable code of professional conduct in relation to the audit. 

This declaration is in respect of Slater and Gordon Limited and Controlled Entities it controlled during 
the financial year. 

End of Remuneration Report 

Ernst & Young 

Christopher George 
Partner 
Melbourne 
29 August 2018 

Slater & Gordon Limited

Page 22 

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

Page 23 

31

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other 
Comprehensive Income
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Revenue 
Fee revenue 
Net movement in work in progress

Revenue from contracts with customers
Other income

Total revenue and other income 
Less expenses
Salaries and employee benefit expense
Payments to former owners
Share based payment expense to former owners
Rental expense
Advertising, marketing and new business development expense
Administration and office expense
Consultant fees
Finance costs
Bad and doubtful debts
Depreciation and amortisation expense
Other expenses
Impairment of intangible assets

Loss from continuing operations before income tax expense
Income tax expense / (benefit) 

Loss from continuing operations for the year after income tax 

Note

3.1

3.2

3.2

3.2

4.1

3.4

Discontinued Operations
Pre-tax (loss) from discontinued operations
Income tax expense / (benefit) from discontinued operations
Net gain from disposal of discontinued operations
Income tax (benefit) on disposal of discontinued operations
Profit / (loss) from discontinued operations after income tax 
Profit / (loss) for the year after income tax

10.1
3.4, 10.1
10.1
3.4, 10.1

Profit / (loss) for the year attributed to:
Owners of the Company
Non-controlling interests

Other comprehensive income, net of tax
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:
Foreign currency translation differences – foreign operations
Changes in fair value of cash flow hedges

Total items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

Total comprehensive income / (loss) for the year, net of tax

Total comprehensive income / (loss) for the year attributed to:
Owners of the Company
Non-controlling interests

2018 
$’000 

162,166
(2,916) 

159,250
1,026

160,276

97,048
-
1,364
10,331
12,567
21,407
7,103
16,371
11,612
3,710
8,001
-

(29,238)
2,678

(31,916)

(61,059)
(2,904)
187,591
(16,210)
145,646
113,730

113,726
4 

113,730

(10,414)
(250)

(10,664)

103,066

103,067
(1)

103,066

Restated(1)
2017 
$’000 

194,024
(12,551) 

181,473
1,541

183,014

116,953
3,875
4,440
16,760
13,975
40,106
17,669
19,378
14,202
5,488
15,478
10,959

(96,269)
(21,810) 

(74,459)

(454,880)
17,492
-
-
(472,372)
(546,831)

(546,549)
(282)

(546,831)

(8,188)
1,721

(6,467)

(553,298)

(553,014)
(284)

(553,298)

(1)

The prior year comparative has been restated in accordance with the requirements of the Australian Accounting Standards as a result of the discontinued operations.

Slater and Gordon Limited

32

Page 24 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Consolidated  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other 

Comprehensive Income

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Consolidated  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other 
Comprehensive Income
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Total comprehensive income / (loss) for the year attributed to 
owners of the Company from:
Continuing operations
Discontinued operations

Earnings / (loss) per share from continuing operations:
Basic (loss) per share
Diluted (loss) per share

Earnings / (loss) per share from discontinued operations
Basic / (loss) earnings per share
Diluted earnings / (loss) per share

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Note

3.6
3.6

3.6
3.6

2018
$’000

(31,916)
134,983

103,067

(0.843)
(0.843)

Restated(1)
2017
$’000

(74,459)
(478,555)

(553,014)

(21.168)
(21.168)

3.847
3.847

(134.213)
(134.213)

Note

3.1

3.2

3.2

3.2

4.1

3.4

Revenue 

Fee revenue 

Net movement in work in progress

Revenue from contracts with customers

Other income

Total revenue and other income 

Less expenses

Salaries and employee benefit expense

Payments to former owners

Administration and office expense

Consultant fees

Finance costs

Bad and doubtful debts

Depreciation and amortisation expense

Other expenses

Impairment of intangible assets

Share based payment expense to former owners

Rental expense

Advertising, marketing and new business development expense

Loss from continuing operations before income tax expense

Income tax expense / (benefit) 

Loss from continuing operations for the year after income tax 

Discontinued Operations

Pre-tax (loss) from discontinued operations

Income tax expense / (benefit) from discontinued operations

Net gain from disposal of discontinued operations

Income tax (benefit) on disposal of discontinued operations

Profit / (loss) from discontinued operations after income tax 

Profit / (loss) for the year after income tax

10.1

3.4, 10.1

10.1

3.4, 10.1

Profit / (loss) for the year attributed to:

Owners of the Company

Non-controlling interests

Other comprehensive income, net of tax

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:

Foreign currency translation differences – foreign operations

Changes in fair value of cash flow hedges

Total items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

Total comprehensive income / (loss) for the year, net of tax

Total comprehensive income / (loss) for the year attributed to:

Owners of the Company

Non-controlling interests

2018 

$’000 

162,166

(2,916) 

159,250

1,026

160,276

97,048

-

1,364

10,331

12,567

21,407

7,103

16,371

11,612

3,710

8,001

-

(29,238)

2,678

(31,916)

(61,059)

(2,904)

187,591

(16,210)

145,646

113,730

113,726

4 

113,730

(10,414)

(250)

(10,664)

103,066

103,067

(1)

103,066

Restated(1)

2017 

$’000 

194,024

(12,551) 

181,473

1,541

183,014

116,953

3,875

4,440

16,760

13,975

40,106

17,669

19,378

14,202

5,488

15,478

10,959

(96,269)

(21,810) 

(74,459)

(454,880)

17,492

-

-

(472,372)

(546,831)

(546,549)

(282)

(546,831)

(8,188)

1,721

(6,467)

(553,298)

(553,014)

(284)

(553,298)

(1)

The prior year comparative has been restated in accordance with the requirements of the Australian Accounting Standards as a result of the discontinued operations.

(1)

The prior year comparative has been restated in accordance with the requirements of the Australian Accounting Standards as a result of the discontinued operations.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 24 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 25 

33

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position
As at 30 June 2018

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents
Receivables

Work in progress

Current tax assets

Other current assets

Assets held for sale

Total current assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Receivables

Work in progress

Intangible assets

Deferred tax assets

Other non-current assets

Total non-current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Payables

Short term borrowings

Current tax liabilities

Other current liabilities

Provisions

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Long term borrowings

Deferred tax liabilities

Derivative financial instruments

Provisions

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets / (liabilities)

Equity

Contributed equity

Reserves

Accumulated losses

Total equity attributable to equity holders in the Company

Non-controlling interest

Total equity

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Note

4.2

4.3

3.4

10.8

4.4

4.2

4.3

4.1

3.4

4.5

5.2

3.4

4.6

5.2

3.4

4.6

5.5

2018
$’000

18,778

70,498

110,764

-

7,871

133

2017
$’000

33,303

395,466

294,871

3

21,144

-

208,044

744,787

9,372

16,411

115,029

797

-

417

142,026

350,070

52,091

11,798

-

-

21,757

85,646

143,321

49,531

-

8,277

201,129

286,775

63,295

1,348,581

12,885

26,555

91,492

220,094

13,112

34,718

536

386,507

1,131,294

418,619

466,240

8,250

1,815

54,532

949,456

314,702

93,361

1,419

21,172

430,654

1,380,110

(248,816)

1,119,235

44,023

(1,298,171)

(1,411,897)

63,295

(248,639)

-

(177)

63,295

(248,816)

34

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 26 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Receivables

Work in progress

Current tax assets

Other current assets

Assets held for sale

Total current assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Receivables

Work in progress

Intangible assets

Deferred tax assets

Other non-current assets

Total non-current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Payables

Short term borrowings

Current tax liabilities

Other current liabilities

Provisions

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Long term borrowings

Deferred tax liabilities

Derivative financial instruments

Provisions

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets / (liabilities)

Equity

Contributed equity

Reserves

Accumulated losses

Non-controlling interest

Total equity

Note

4.2

4.3

3.4

10.8

4.4

4.2

4.3

4.1

3.4

4.5

5.2

3.4

4.6

5.2

3.4

4.6

5.5

208,044

744,787

2017

$’000

33,303

395,466

294,871

21,144

3

-

26,555

91,492

220,094

13,112

34,718

536

386,507

1,131,294

418,619

466,240

8,250

1,815

54,532

949,456

314,702

93,361

1,419

21,172

430,654

1,380,110

(248,816)

1,119,235

44,023

2018

$’000

18,778

70,498

110,764

-

7,871

133

9,372

16,411

115,029

797

-

417

142,026

350,070

52,091

11,798

21,757

85,646

143,321

49,531

8,277

201,129

286,775

63,295

-

-

-

-

1,348,581

12,885

(1,298,171)

(1,411,897)

63,295

(248,639)

(177)

63,295

(248,816)

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position

As at 30 June 2018

Consolidated Statement of Changes In Equity
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

2018

Note Contributed 
Equity

Accumulat
ed Losses

Cash Flow 
Hedging 
Reserve

Foreign 
Currency 
Translation 
Reserve

Share-based 
Payment 
Reserve

Total

Non-
controlling
interest

Total 
Equity

Balance as at 1 July 2017

Net profit after tax for the year

Total other comprehensive loss for the year

Total comprehensive loss for the year 

Transactions with owners in their capacity 
as owners

Issuance of shares under Senior Lender 
Scheme

Reclassification to profit or loss on 
extinguishment of debt

Reclassification to profit or loss on disposal of 
discontinued operations

Transfer from share based payments reserve

5.5

Performance rights

Recognition of share based payments expense 
to former owners

Total transactions with owners in their 
capacity as owners

-

-

-

5.5

221,270

-

-

8,076

-

-

229,346

$’000

$’000

1,119,235

(1,411,897)

$’000

$’000

$’000

$’000

$’000

27,513

17,108

(248,639)

(177)

(248,816)

113,726

-

-

(250)

(10,409)

113,726

(250)

(10,409)

$’000

(598)

-

-

848

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

113,726

(10,659)

4

(5)

113,730

(10,664)

103,067

(1)

103,066

221,270

848

-

-

221,270

848

(17,104)

178

(16,926)

-

-

-

(8,076)

8

-

8

3,845

3,845

-

-

-

-

8

3,845

-

-

(17,104)

Balance as at 30 June 2018

2017

Balance as at 1 July 2016

Net loss after tax for the year

Total other comprehensive loss for the year

Total comprehensive loss for the year 

Transactions with owners in their capacity 
as owners

Ordinary and VCR shares issued / (bought 
back)

Cancellation of VCR shares

848

(17,104)

(4,223)

208,867

178

209,045

1,348,581

(1,298,171)

-

-

12,885

Note

Contributed 
Equity

Accumulat
ed Losses

Cash Flow 
Hedging 
Reserve

Foreign 
Currency 
Translation 
Reserve

Share-based 
Payment 
Reserve

63,295

Total

-

Non-
controlling
interest

63,295

Total 
Equity

$’000

$’000

$’000

$’000

$’000

$’000

$’000

$’000

1,116,048

(865,348)

(2,319)

35,699

20,910

304,990

107

305,097

-

-

-

(546,549)

-

-

-

1,721

(8,186)

(546,549)

1,721

(8,186)

(546,549)

(282)

(546,831)

(6,465)

(2)

(6,467)

(553,014)

(284)

(553,298)

5.5

(9,232)

525

11,907

-

(13)

-

3,187

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(9,232)

525

-

7,170

7,170

-

935

(13)

935

(3,802)

(615)

-

-

-

-

-

-

(9,232)

525

-

7,170

(13)

935

(615)

-

-

-

-

-

(11,907)

Total equity attributable to equity holders in the Company

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Transfer from share based payments reserve

5.5

Recognition of share based payments expense
to former owners

Costs of share registry

Performance rights

5.5

Total transactions with owners in their 
capacity as owners

Balance as at 30 June 2017

1,119,235

(1,411,897)

(598)

27,513

17,108

(248,639)

(177)

(248,816)

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 26 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 27 

35

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018 

Note

2018
$’000

Cash flow from operating activities

Receipts from customers

Payments to suppliers and employees

Payments to former owners

Interest received

Borrowing costs

Net income tax (paid) / refunded

Net cash (used in) operating activities of continuing operations

Net cash (used in) operating activities of discontinued operations

Total net cash (used in) operating activities

3.3

Cash flow from investing activities
Payment for software development

Payment for plant and equipment

Deposits for bank guarantees

Costs associated with acquisition of businesses

Cash balance transferred on disposal of business

Payment for acquisition of businesses – deferred consideration

Net cash flow (used in) investing activities of continuing operations

Net cash (used in) investing activities of discontinued operations

Total net cash (used in) investing activities

Cash flow from financing activities

Costs of share registry management

Loans repaid / (advanced) to related parties and employees 

Proceeds from borrowings

Repayment of borrowings

Net cash provided by financing activities of continuing operations

Net cash provided by / (used in) financing activities of discontinued operations

Total net cash provided by financing activities

Net decrease in cash held

Net increase / (decrease) in foreign exchange differences

Cash at the beginning of the financial year

Cash at the end of the financial year

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

212,883
(209,950)

(5,250)

-

(2,483)

(3,180)

(7,980)

(40,262)

(48,242)

(820)

(2,989)

(3,933)

-

(18,439)

(425)

(26,606)

(7,137)

(33,743)

-

410

62,854

(5,091)

58,173

8,475

66,648

(15,337)

812

33,303

18,778

Restated(1)
2017
$’000

196,004
(213,186)

(9,000)

221

(3,885)

7,626

(22,220)

(16,868)

(39,088)

(1,232)

(1,814)

-

(2)

-

(2,073)

(5,121)

(6,648)

(11,769)

(13)

(504)

15,002

(3,555)

10,930

(5,280)

5,650

(45,207)

(3,984)

82,494

33,303

(1)

The prior year comparative has been restated in accordance with the requirements of the Australian Accounting Standards as a result of the discontinued operations.

36

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 28 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018 

Note

2018

$’000

Cash flow from operating activities

Receipts from customers

Payments to suppliers and employees

Payments to former owners

Interest received

Borrowing costs

Net income tax (paid) / refunded

Net cash (used in) operating activities of continuing operations

Net cash (used in) operating activities of discontinued operations

Total net cash (used in) operating activities

3.3

Cash flow from investing activities

Payment for software development

Payment for plant and equipment

Deposits for bank guarantees

Costs associated with acquisition of businesses

Cash balance transferred on disposal of business

Payment for acquisition of businesses – deferred consideration

Net cash flow (used in) investing activities of continuing operations

Net cash (used in) investing activities of discontinued operations

Total net cash (used in) investing activities

Cash flow from financing activities

Costs of share registry management

Loans repaid / (advanced) to related parties and employees 

Proceeds from borrowings

Repayment of borrowings

Net cash provided by financing activities of continuing operations

Net cash provided by / (used in) financing activities of discontinued operations

Total net cash provided by financing activities

Net decrease in cash held

Net increase / (decrease) in foreign exchange differences

Cash at the beginning of the financial year

Cash at the end of the financial year

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Restated(1)

2017

$’000

196,004

(213,186)

(9,000)

221

(3,885)

7,626

(22,220)

(16,868)

(39,088)

(1,232)

(1,814)

(2)

-

-

(2,073)

(5,121)

(6,648)

(11,769)

(13)

(504)

15,002

(3,555)

10,930

(5,280)

5,650

(45,207)

(3,984)

82,494

33,303

212,883

(209,950)

(5,250)

-

(2,483)

(3,180)

(7,980)

(40,262)

(48,242)

(820)

(2,989)

(3,933)

-

(18,439)

(425)

(26,606)

(7,137)

(33,743)

-

410

62,854

(5,091)

58,173

8,475

66,648

(15,337)

812

33,303

18,778

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018 

Note 1:  Basis of Preparation

This  note  sets  out  the  accounting  policies  adopted  by  Slater  and  Gordon  Limited  (the  “Company”  or  “Parent”)  and  its 
consolidated entities (the “Consolidated Entity” or the “Group”) in the preparation and presentation of the financial report. 
Where an accounting policy is specific to one note, the policy is described within the note to which it relates.

The financial report was authorised for issue by the directors as at the date of the Directors’ Report.

Slater  and Gordon  Limited  is a  Company limited  by shares,  incorporated  and domiciled  in  Australia  whose shares are 
publicly traded on the Australian Securities Exchange.

1.1.

Basis of Accounting

This financial report is a general purpose financial report, for a ‘for-profit’ entity, which has been prepared in accordance 
with  Australian  Accounting  Standards,  Interpretations  and  other  applicable  authoritative  pronouncements  of  the 
Australian Accounting Standards Board and the Corporations Act 2001. The consolidated financial statements of Slater 
and Gordon Limited also comply with the International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) issued by the International 
Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”).

The financial report has been prepared under the historical cost convention, except where noted. 

The consolidated financial statements provide comparative information in respect of the previous period.

Where  necessary,  comparative  figures  have  been  reclassified  and  repositioned  for  consistency  with  current  year 
disclosures.

The  parent  entity  and  the  consolidated  entity  have  applied  the  relief  available  under  ASIC  Corporations  (Rounding  in 
Financial/Directors’ Reports) Instrument 2016/191 and accordingly, amounts in the consolidated financial statements and 
Directors’ Report have been rounded off to the nearest thousand dollars, or in certain cases, to the nearest dollar. 

Going Concern

The financial statements have been prepared using the going concern assumption which contemplates the realisation of 
assets and the settlement of liabilities in the ordinary course of business. 

The  Recapitalisation  of  the  Group  was  deemed  effective  from  15  December  2017  and  implemented  on  22  December 
2017 after passing the requisite Shareholders’ approval at the AGM on 6 December 2017. 

Following  implementation  of  the  Recapitalisation,  the  Directors  have  determined  that  there  is  no  longer  a  material 
uncertainty that exists in relation to the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern due to the debt facilities having 
been  restated  to  a  sustainable  level,  additional  liquidity  being  provided  via  extended  working  capital  facilities  and 
ownership of the UK being separated and transferred. 

The Group permanently reduced its outstanding secured debt under the Recapitalisation (refer Note 5). As at 30 June 
2018, the Group’s total borrowings (excluding lease liabilities) were $155,118,000. Of this, $11,798,000 is presented as 
current  liabilities,  being due  for  repayment in  the next  12  months.  The  remaining $143,321,000 of  debt  is  non-current. 
Furthermore,  as  at  30  June  2018,  the  Group  has  a  positive  net  current  asset  balance  of  $122,398,000 and  a  positive 
overall net asset balance of $63,295,000. Based on internal cash flow forecasts to 31 August 2019, the Group expects to 
remain in compliance with financial covenants under the New Super Senior Facility and has sufficient funds available to 
meet its obligations.

Consequently, the Directors have concluded that there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Group will continue to 
be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable, and the preparation of the 30 June 2018 financial 
report on a going concern basis is appropriate.

Basis of Consolidation

The consolidated financial statements comprise the financial statements of the parent entity and of all entities which the 
parent  entity  controls.  The  Group  controls  an  entity  when  it  is  exposed,  or  has  rights,  to  variable  returns  from  its 
involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity.

The financial statements of subsidiaries are prepared for the same reporting period as the parent entity, using consistent 
accounting policies. Adjustments are made to bring into line any dissimilar accounting policies which may exist. 

All  inter-company  balances  and  transactions,  including  any  unrealised  profits  or  losses,  have  been  eliminated  on 
consolidation.  Subsidiaries  are  consolidated  from  the  date on  which  control is  established  and are de-recognised  from 
the date that control ceases.

Non-controlling  interests  in  the  results  of  subsidiaries  are  shown  separately  in  the  Consolidated  Statement  of  Profit  or 
Loss and Other Comprehensive Income and Consolidated Statement of Financial Position. 

Any  changes  in  the  Group’s  ownership  interests  in  subsidiaries that  do  not  result  in  the  Group  losing  control  over  the 
subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions.

(1)

The prior year comparative has been restated in accordance with the requirements of the Australian Accounting Standards as a result of the discontinued operations.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 28 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 29 

37

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

1.2.

Adoption of New Accounting Standards

The  Company adopted  all  the  new  mandatory  standards  and  interpretations  for  the  current  reporting  period.  This 
included  application  of  amendments  in  AASB  2016-2 Amendments  to  Australian  Accounting  Standards  – Disclosure 
Initiative:  Amendments  to  AASB  107, which  require  disclosure  of  changes  in  liabilities  arising  from  financing  activities, 
see Note 5.2.2. Except for the above amendment, the adoption of these standards and interpretations did not result in a 
material change to the reported results and position or disclosures of the Group as they did not result in any changes to 
the Group’s existing accounting policies.

1.3.

Significant Accounting Judgements, Estimates and Assumptions

In  preparing  these consolidated  financial statements,  management  has made judgements,  estimates  and  assumptions 
that affect the application of the Group’s accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and 
expenses.  Actual  results  may  differ  from  these  estimates.  Estimates  and  underlying  assumptions  are  reviewed  on  an 
ongoing basis. Revisions to estimates are recognised prospectively. 

The  significant  judgements  made  by  management  in  applying  the  Group’s  accounting  policies  and  the  key  sources  of 
estimation uncertainty are outlined in detail within the specific note to which they relate. 

1.4.

Foreign Currency Translations and Balances 

Functional and Presentation Currency

The  consolidated  financial  statements  are  presented  in  Australian  dollars  which  is  also  the  functional  currency  of  the 
parent  entity  and  all  Australian  subsidiaries.  The  financial  statements  of  each  entity  within  the  consolidated  entity  are 
measured  using  the  currency  of  the  primary  economic  environment  in  which  that entity  operates  (the  functional 
currency).

Transactions and Balances

Transactions in foreign currencies of entities within the consolidated group are translated into the respective functional 
currency of each entity at the rate of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. The assets, liabilities and results of
foreign  operations  where their functional  currency  is  different  to the presentation  currency  are  translated  as  disclosed 
below.

Foreign currency monetary items that are outstanding at the reporting date are translated using the spot rate at the end 
of the financial year.

Except  for  certain  foreign  currency  hedges,  all  resulting  exchange  differences  arising  on settlement  or  re-statement  of 
monetary items are recognised as income and expenses in profit or loss for the financial year. 

Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange 
rates at the dates of the initial transactions and are not remeasured unless they are carried at fair value.

Foreign Operations

On  consolidation,  the  assets  and  liabilities  of  foreign  operations  are  translated  into  the  presentation  currency  of  the 
Group at the closing rate on the reporting date. Income and expenses are translated at average exchange rates for the 
period, unless the exchange rate fluctuated significantly during the period, in which case the exchange rates at the dates 
of  the  transactions  are  used.  All  resulting  exchange  differences  are  recognised  in  Other  Comprehensive  Income  and 
accumulated in the foreign currency translation reserve, a separate component of equity.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign operation are treated as assets and liabilities of 
the foreign operation and translated at the closing rate.

Note 2:  Segment Reporting

An operating segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues 
and  incur  expenses,  including  revenues  and  expenses  that  relate  to  transactions  with  any  of  the  Group’s  other 
components. 

Following  the  restructure  of  the  Group  completed  during  the  period,  the  Group  has  one  reportable  segment,  which 
provides  legal  services  in  Australia.  Information  provided  to  the  chief  operating  decision  maker  for  the  purposes  of 
making decisions about allocating resources to the segment and assessing its performance is consistent with amounts 
presented  in  the  Consolidated  Financial  Statements.  The  Group  has  not  restated  the corresponding  items  of  segment 
information for earlier periods. The Group’s revenues and non-current assets are wholly based in Australia. The Group is 
not reliant on any single customer. 

As the Group continues to implement its transformation strategy, it will re-evaluate the information provided to the chief 
operating decision maker, which may change the Group's operating segments going forward.

Slater and Gordon Limited

38

Page 30 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

1.2.

Adoption of New Accounting Standards

The  Company adopted  all  the  new  mandatory  standards  and  interpretations  for  the  current  reporting  period.  This 

included  application  of  amendments  in  AASB  2016-2 Amendments  to  Australian  Accounting  Standards  – Disclosure 

Initiative:  Amendments  to  AASB  107, which  require  disclosure  of  changes  in  liabilities  arising  from  financing  activities, 

see Note 5.2.2. Except for the above amendment, the adoption of these standards and interpretations did not result in a 

material change to the reported results and position or disclosures of the Group as they did not result in any changes to 

the Group’s existing accounting policies.

1.3.

Significant Accounting Judgements, Estimates and Assumptions

In  preparing  these consolidated  financial statements,  management  has made judgements,  estimates  and  assumptions 

that affect the application of the Group’s accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and 

expenses.  Actual  results  may  differ  from  these  estimates.  Estimates  and  underlying  assumptions  are  reviewed  on  an 

ongoing basis. Revisions to estimates are recognised prospectively. 

The  significant  judgements  made  by  management  in  applying  the  Group’s  accounting  policies  and  the  key  sources  of 

estimation uncertainty are outlined in detail within the specific note to which they relate. 

1.4.

Foreign Currency Translations and Balances 

Functional and Presentation Currency

The  consolidated  financial  statements  are  presented  in  Australian  dollars  which  is  also  the  functional  currency  of  the 

parent  entity  and  all  Australian  subsidiaries.  The  financial  statements  of  each  entity  within  the  consolidated  entity  are 

measured  using  the  currency  of  the  primary  economic  environment  in  which  that entity  operates  (the  functional 

currency).

Transactions and Balances

below.

of the financial year.

Foreign Operations

Transactions in foreign currencies of entities within the consolidated group are translated into the respective functional 

currency of each entity at the rate of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. The assets, liabilities and results of

foreign  operations  where their functional  currency  is  different  to the presentation  currency  are  translated  as  disclosed 

Foreign currency monetary items that are outstanding at the reporting date are translated using the spot rate at the end 

Except  for  certain  foreign  currency  hedges,  all  resulting  exchange  differences  arising  on settlement  or  re-statement  of 

monetary items are recognised as income and expenses in profit or loss for the financial year. 

Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange 

rates at the dates of the initial transactions and are not remeasured unless they are carried at fair value.

On  consolidation,  the  assets  and  liabilities  of  foreign  operations  are  translated  into  the  presentation  currency  of  the 

Group at the closing rate on the reporting date. Income and expenses are translated at average exchange rates for the 

period, unless the exchange rate fluctuated significantly during the period, in which case the exchange rates at the dates 

of  the  transactions  are  used.  All  resulting  exchange  differences  are  recognised  in  Other  Comprehensive  Income  and 

accumulated in the foreign currency translation reserve, a separate component of equity.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign operation are treated as assets and liabilities of 

the foreign operation and translated at the closing rate.

Note 2:  Segment Reporting

An operating segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues 

and  incur  expenses,  including  revenues  and  expenses  that  relate  to  transactions  with  any  of  the  Group’s  other 

components. 

Following  the  restructure  of  the  Group  completed  during  the  period,  the  Group  has  one  reportable  segment,  which 

provides  legal  services  in  Australia.  Information  provided  to  the  chief  operating  decision  maker  for  the  purposes  of 

making decisions about allocating resources to the segment and assessing its performance is consistent with amounts 

presented  in  the  Consolidated  Financial  Statements.  The  Group  has  not  restated  the corresponding  items  of  segment 

information for earlier periods. The Group’s revenues and non-current assets are wholly based in Australia. The Group is 

not reliant on any single customer. 

As the Group continues to implement its transformation strategy, it will re-evaluate the information provided to the chief 

operating decision maker, which may change the Group's operating segments going forward.

Note 3:  Financial Performance

3.1.

Revenue from Contracts with Customers

3.1.1. Accounting Policies

Provision of Legal Services – Personal Injury Law Claims

The Group early adopted AASB 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers during the year ended 30 June 2016. The 
personal injury law practice operates on the basis of No Win – No Fee conditional fee arrangements, whereby fees are 
earned only in the event of a successful outcome of a customer’s claim. In some cases, fees may be fixed, depending on 
the  stage  at  which  a  matter  concludes.  For  some  arrangements  (primarily  in  the  UK),  fees  are  fixed  as  a  specified 
percentage of damages awarded under a claim.

In  personal  injury  matters,  contracts  with  clients  generally  comprise  a  single  distinct  performance  obligation,  being  the 
provision of services in pursuit of the successful settlement of a customer’s claim, and the transaction price is allocated 
to this single performance obligation.  Some contracts contain multiple deliverables – such as legal services in respect of 
a  statutory  claim  and  a  common  law  claim,  or  initial  pre-issue  work  and  litigation  work.  In  such  circumstances,  these 
multiple  deliverables  are  considered  to  represent  a  single  distinct  performance  obligation,  given  there  is  a  significant 
service  of  integration  performed  by  the  Group  in  delivering  these  services.  Management  considers  the  methods  used 
provide a faithful depiction of the transfer of goods or services.

The uncertainty around the fees receivable under a contract is generally only resolved when a matter is concluded. In 
recognising  revenue  in  the  personal  injury  practice,  where  the  Group  has  sufficient  historical  experience  in  similar 
contracts in order to be able to estimate the expected outcome of a group of existing contracts reliably, revenue from the 
fees from contracts is estimated using the expected value method base. The estimated amount of variable consideration 
is based on the expected fee for the nature of the legal service with reference to historical fee levels and relative rates of 
successful  and  unsuccessful  outcomes.  To  determine  the  probability  of  success  of  a  case,  a  level  of  judgement  is 
required to be applied based on past experience and historical performance of similar matters.

Expected fees are only included in revenue to the extent that it is highly probable that the cumulative amount of revenue 
recognised  in  respect  of  a  contract  at  the  end  of  a  reporting  period  will  not  be  subject  to  significant  reversal  when  a 
matter is concluded. 

Where historical averages are not predictive of the probability of outcomes for a given contract, or where the Group has 
limited  historical  experience  with similar  contracts,  the  expected amount  of  variable  consideration is estimated using a 
most likely amount approach on a contract by contract basis. In such circumstances, a level of judgement is required to 
determine the likelihood of success of a given matter, as well as the estimated amount of fees that will be recovered in 
respect of the matter. 

Revenue  is  recognised  when  control  of  a  service  is  transferred  to  the  customer.    The  Group  recognises  revenue  in 
respect  of personal  injury  matters  “over  time”  (as  opposed  to  at  a  “point  in time”).    A  stage  of  completion  approach is 
used  to  measure  progress  towards  completion  of  the  performance  obligation.    The  stage  of  completion  is  determined 
using  a  milestones  based  approach  using  prescribed  status  codes  for  client  matters  as  the  relevant milestones.    The 
percentage  completion  is  determined  either  by  calculating  the  average  fee  received  for  matters  that  resolve  at  a 
particular status code as a percentage of the average fee received for matters that resolve at that status and any later 
status, or by use of defined completion allocations based on historical performance.

Estimates  of  revenues  (including  interim  billing),  costs  or  extent  of  progress  toward  completion  are  revised  if 
circumstances change. Any resulting increases or decreases in estimated revenues or costs are reflected in profit or loss 
in the period in which the circumstances that give rise to the revision become known by management.

The  Group  has  determined  that  no  significant  financing  component  exists  in  respect  of  the  personal  injury  revenue 
streams. This is because in personal injury matters, a substantial amount of the consideration promised by the customer 
is variable subject to the occurrence or non-occurrence of a future event that is not substantially within the control of the 
customer or the Group.  

A  receivable  in  relation  to  these  services  is  recognised  on  settlement  of  the  client  matter  and  when  a  bill  has  been 
invoiced, as this is the point in time that the consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required 
before the payment is due.

The Company arranges for the disbursement activities on behalf of the client; however it does not control the output 
from those activities.  The Company cannot influence the content of the medical reports or court filings, therefore no 
profit margin is recognised on the activities and the clients are charged the direct cost incurred by the Company.  As 
such,  the  Company  acts  as  an  agent  for  disbursements,  which  are  only  recognised  when  it  is  assessed  that  a 
reimbursement will be received from the client or on his or her behalf.  The disbursements are treated as a separate 
asset.  The amount recognised for the expected reimbursement does not exceed the relevant costs incurred.

The amount of any expected reimbursement is reduced by an allowance for non-recovery based on past experience.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 30 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 31 

39

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.1.1 Accounting Policies (continued)

When new businesses are acquired, there is a transition period during which time the Group’s practices and procedures 
are  embedded  into  the  operations  of  the  new  business.  Therefore  the  valuation  of  work  in  progress  acquired  in  a 
business combination may be adjusted during the period of provisional accounting for the acquisition.

Provision of Legal Services – Litigation and Emerging Services

The  Group  also  earns  revenue  from  provision  of  general  legal  services,  incorporating  project  litigation.  Revenue  for 
general legal services is recognised over time in the accounting period when services are rendered. 

Fee  arrangements  from  general  legal  services  include  fixed  fee  arrangements,  unconditional  fee  for  service
arrangements  (“time  and  materials”),  and  variable  or  contingent  fee  arrangements  (including  No  Win  – No  Fee 
arrangements for services including project litigation, and some consumer and commercial litigation). 

For  fixed  fee  arrangements,  revenue  is  recognised  based  on  the  stage  of  completion  with  reference  to  the  actual 
services  provided  as  a  proportion  of  the  total  services  expected  to  be  provided  under  the  contract.  The  stage  of 
completion is tracked on a contract by contract basis using a milestone based approach, which was explained above.

In  fee  for  service  contracts,  revenue  is  recognised  up  to  the  amount  of  fees  that  the  Group  is  entitled  to  invoice  for 
services performed to date based on contracted rates.

The Group estimates fees for variable or conditional service fee arrangements using a most likely amount approach on 
a  contract  by  contract  basis.  Management  makes  a  detailed  assessment  of  the  amount  of  revenue  expected  to  be 
received and the probability of success of each case. Variable consideration is included in revenue only to the extent 
that  it  is  highly  probable  that  the  amount  will  not  be  subject  to  significant  reversal  when  the  uncertainty  is  resolved 
(generally when a matter is concluded). 

Certain  project  litigation  matters  are  undertaken  on  a  partially  funded  basis.  The  Group  has  arrangements  with  third 
party  funders  to  provide  a  portion  of  the  fees  receivable  on  a  matter  over  time  as  services  are  performed.  In  such 
arrangements, the funded portion of fees is billed regularly over time and is not contingent on the successful outcome 
of  the  litigation.    The  remaining  portion  of  fees  is  variable  consideration  which  is  conditional  on  the  successful 
resolution  of  the  litigation.    The  variable  consideration  is  included  in  revenue  as  services  are performed  only  to  the 
extent  that  it  is  highly  probable  that  the  amount  will  not  be  subject  to  significant  reversal  when  the  uncertainty  is 
resolved.

As  in  the  case  of  personal  injury  claims,  estimates  of  revenues,  costs  or  extent  of  progress  toward  completion  are 
revised if circumstances change. Any resulting increases or decreases in estimated revenues or costs are reflected in 
profit or loss in the period in which the circumstances that give rise to the revision become known by management.

The  Group  has  determined  that  no  significant  financing  component  exists  in  respect  of  the  general  law  services 
revenue  streams.    This  has  been  determined  on  fee  for  service  and  fixed  fee  arrangements  as  the  period  between 
when  the  entity  transfers  a  promised  good  or  service  to  a  customer  and  when  the  customer  pays  for  that  good  or 
service will be one year or less.  For No Win - No Fee arrangements this has been determined because a significant 
amount  of  the  consideration  promised  by  the  customer  is  variable  subject to  the  occurrence  or  non-occurrence  of  a 
future event that is not substantially within the control of the customer or the Group.  

A receivable in relation to these services is recognised when a bill has been invoiced, as this is the point in time that the
consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due.

Provision of Other Services – Slater Gordon Solutions (Discontinued Operations)

Legal Services

Revenue from Road Traffic Accidents (“RTA”) and Employer Liability/Public Liability (“EL/PL”) files is recognised over 
the life of the case based on prescribed milestones in a matter.

The legal services practice operates on the basis of No Win – No Fee conditional fee arrangements and applies the 
same accounting policies as personal injury claims described above. In some cases, fees may be fixed, depending on 
the stage at which a matter concludes. For some arrangements, fees are fixed as a specified percentage of damages 
awarded under a claim.

Vehicle Hire and Repair 

Revenue from the provision of car repair is recognised at a point in time. Revenue from the provision of car hire and 
cost recovery services are recognised over the time that the services are performed.

For  car  repair  services,  revenue  is  recognised upon  completion  of  all  repair  work  and  upon  the  customer  signing  a 
“client  satisfaction  note”  in  taking  back  possession  of  the  car.  The  amount  of  revenue  recognised  is  the  amount  as 
agreed in writing between the parties prior to the service being provided in the repair contract. 

For  car  hire  and  cost  recovery  services,  the  revenue  is  recognised  over  time,  being  the  period  between  the 
commencement of the car hire and settlement of costs through the Third Party Insurer (“TPI”). The amount of revenue 
recognised is the amount as agreed in writing between the parties prior to the service being provided in the hire rental 
agreement.  

Slater and Gordon Limited

40

Page 32 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.1.1 Accounting Policies (continued)

3.1.1 Accounting Policies (continued)

When new businesses are acquired, there is a transition period during which time the Group’s practices and procedures 

are  embedded  into  the  operations  of  the  new  business.  Therefore  the  valuation  of  work  in  progress  acquired  in  a 

business combination may be adjusted during the period of provisional accounting for the acquisition.

Provision of Legal Services – Litigation and Emerging Services

The  Group  also  earns  revenue  from  provision  of  general  legal  services,  incorporating  project  litigation.  Revenue  for 

general legal services is recognised over time in the accounting period when services are rendered. 

Fee  arrangements  from  general  legal  services  include  fixed  fee  arrangements,  unconditional  fee  for  service

arrangements  (“time  and  materials”),  and  variable  or  contingent  fee  arrangements  (including  No  Win  – No  Fee 

arrangements for services including project litigation, and some consumer and commercial litigation). 

For  fixed  fee  arrangements,  revenue  is  recognised  based  on  the  stage  of  completion  with  reference  to  the  actual 

services  provided  as  a  proportion  of  the  total  services  expected  to  be  provided  under  the  contract.  The  stage  of 

completion is tracked on a contract by contract basis using a milestone based approach, which was explained above.

In  fee  for  service  contracts,  revenue  is  recognised  up  to  the  amount  of  fees  that  the  Group  is  entitled  to  invoice  for 

services performed to date based on contracted rates.

The Group estimates fees for variable or conditional service fee arrangements using a most likely amount approach on 

a  contract  by  contract  basis.  Management  makes  a  detailed  assessment  of  the  amount  of  revenue  expected  to  be 

received and the probability of success of each case. Variable consideration is included in revenue only to the extent 

that  it  is  highly  probable  that  the  amount  will  not  be  subject  to  significant  reversal  when  the  uncertainty  is  resolved 

(generally when a matter is concluded). 

Certain  project  litigation  matters  are  undertaken  on  a  partially  funded  basis.  The  Group  has  arrangements  with  third 

party  funders  to  provide  a  portion  of  the  fees  receivable  on  a  matter  over  time  as  services  are  performed.  In  such 

arrangements, the funded portion of fees is billed regularly over time and is not contingent on the successful outcome 

of  the  litigation.    The  remaining  portion  of  fees  is  variable  consideration  which  is  conditional  on  the  successful 

resolution  of  the  litigation.    The  variable  consideration  is  included  in  revenue  as  services  are performed  only  to  the 

extent  that  it  is  highly  probable  that  the  amount  will  not  be  subject  to  significant  reversal  when  the  uncertainty  is 

resolved.

As  in  the  case  of  personal  injury  claims,  estimates  of  revenues,  costs  or  extent  of  progress  toward  completion  are 

revised if circumstances change. Any resulting increases or decreases in estimated revenues or costs are reflected in 

profit or loss in the period in which the circumstances that give rise to the revision become known by management.

The  Group  has  determined  that  no  significant  financing  component  exists  in  respect  of  the  general  law  services 

revenue  streams.    This  has  been  determined  on  fee  for  service  and  fixed  fee  arrangements  as  the  period  between 

when  the  entity  transfers  a  promised  good  or  service  to  a  customer  and  when  the  customer  pays  for  that  good  or 

service will be one year or less.  For No Win - No Fee arrangements this has been determined because a significant 

amount  of  the  consideration  promised  by  the  customer  is  variable  subject to  the  occurrence  or  non-occurrence  of  a 

future event that is not substantially within the control of the customer or the Group.  

A receivable in relation to these services is recognised when a bill has been invoiced, as this is the point in time that the

consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due.

Provision of Other Services – Slater Gordon Solutions (Discontinued Operations)

Legal Services

Revenue from Road Traffic Accidents (“RTA”) and Employer Liability/Public Liability (“EL/PL”) files is recognised over 

the life of the case based on prescribed milestones in a matter.

The legal services practice operates on the basis of No Win – No Fee conditional fee arrangements and applies the 

same accounting policies as personal injury claims described above. In some cases, fees may be fixed, depending on 

the stage at which a matter concludes. For some arrangements, fees are fixed as a specified percentage of damages 

awarded under a claim.

Vehicle Hire and Repair 

Revenue from the provision of car repair is recognised at a point in time. Revenue from the provision of car hire and 

cost recovery services are recognised over the time that the services are performed.

For  car  repair  services,  revenue  is  recognised upon  completion  of  all  repair  work  and  upon  the  customer  signing  a 

“client  satisfaction  note”  in  taking  back  possession  of  the  car.  The  amount  of  revenue  recognised  is  the  amount  as 

agreed in writing between the parties prior to the service being provided in the repair contract. 

For  car  hire  and  cost  recovery  services,  the  revenue  is  recognised  over  time,  being  the  period  between  the 

commencement of the car hire and settlement of costs through the Third Party Insurer (“TPI”). The amount of revenue 

recognised is the amount as agreed in writing between the parties prior to the service being provided in the hire rental 

agreement.  

Slater and Gordon Limited

Work  in  progress  is  only  included  in  revenue  to  the  extent  that  it  is  highly  probable  that  the  cumulative  amount  of 
revenue recognised in respect of a contract at the end of a reporting period will not be subject to significant reversal 
when  a  matter  is  concluded.  A  dilution  rate  is  applied  on  the  invoice  to  recognise  the  fact  that  there  may  be  a 
settlement adjustment with the insurer if the insurer disputes any costs.  This also takes into account the fact that some 
cases may not be ‘no fault’.

A receivable in relation to these services is recognised when a bill has been issued, as this is the point in time that the 
consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due.

For car hire and repair services provided for not at fault clients, the Group acts as a principal. Although the services are 
provided  by  third  party  suppliers,  the  Group  has  the  primary  responsibility  to  ensure  that  the  services  have  been 
delivered  to  the  clients.  The  Group  cannot  vary  the  prices  set  by  the  supplier,  as  it  is  governed  by  an  industry 
framework and the Group collects the revenue from the customer and bears all credit risk.

Revenue resulting from car hire and repair services within SGS Motor Services is recognised on a gross basis.

Medical Reports and Rehabilitation Services 

Revenue from the provision of medical appointments and rehabilitation services is recognised at a point in time.

For medical appointments, the revenue is recognised when the medical report is received from the medical expert. The 
amount of revenue recognised is based on the average fee per case calculated on a historic basis.  This value remains 
in  work in  progress until  the medical  report  is  issued  to  the  Instructing  Party  (‘IP‘) at  which  point  the  sales invoice is 
raised.

treatment  is  completed  and  the  final 
For  rehabilitation  services,  the  revenue  is  recognised  when  the  course  of
assessment or discharge report is issued to the IP. The amount of revenue recognised is based on the average fee per 
case  calculated  on  a  historic  basis.  This value  remains  in  work  in  progress  until  the  final  assessment  or  discharge 
report is issued to the IP at which point the sales invoice is raised.

A receivable in relation to these services is recognised when a bill has been issued, as this is the point in time that the 
consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due.

Contract Costs

Applying  the  practical  expedient  in  paragraph  94  of  AASB  15 Revenue  from  Contracts  with  Customers,  the  Group 
recognises the incremental costs of obtaining contracts as an expense when incurred. 

Critical Accounting Estimate and Judgements

(i).

Identifying the Performance Obligation

In  personal  injury  matters,  contracts  with  clients  generally  comprise  a  single  distinct  performance  obligation,  being  the 
provision of services in pursuit of the successful settlement of a customer’s claim, and the transaction price is allocated 
to this single performance obligation.  Some contracts contain multiple deliverables – such as legal services in respect of 
a  statutory  claim  and  a  common  law  claim,  or  initial  pre-issue  work  and  litigation  work.  In  such  circumstances,  these 
multiple  deliverables  are  considered  to  represent  a  single  distinct  performance  obligation,  given  there  is  a  significant 
service  of  integration  performed  by  the  Group  in  delivering  these  services.  Management  considers  the  methods  used 
provide a faithful depiction of the transfer of goods or services.

The  Group  has  some  contractual  arrangements  outside  of  personal  injury  matters  that  include  multiple  performance 
obligations.  In  these  transactions,  the  transaction  price  must  be  allocated  to  the  performance  obligations  on  a  relative 
stand-alone  selling  price  basis.  In  most  cases,  the  price  for  each  separate performance  obligation  is  identified  in  the 
contract  and  in  most  cases,  these  prices  are  considered  to  be  reflective  of  the  stand-alone  selling  price  of  each 
performance obligation. 

The Group notes that it is not practicable to determine and track on a case-by-case basis the elements of a transaction 
that  should  be  attributed  to  pre- and  post-acquisition  performance,  given  the  nature  of  the  estimates  of  variable 
consideration,  and  the methodology  adopted  (based  around  actual  historical  average  fees  and  estimates  of  success 
rates on a cohort-by-cohort rather than case-by-case basis). 

(ii).

Estimating the Transaction Price: Variable Consideration – No Win – No Fee Arrangements 

The  Group  provides  various  services  on the basis of  No Win  – No  Fee conditional  fee  arrangements.  The  uncertainty 
around  the  fees  ultimately  receivable  under  these  types  of  contracts  is  generally  only  fully  resolved  when  a  matter  is 
concluded. 

Where  the  Group  has  sufficient  historical  experience  in  similar  contracts  in  order  to  be  able  to  estimate  the  expected 
outcome of a group of existing contracts reliably, revenue is estimated using the expected value method. Fees are only 
included in revenue to the extent that it is highly probable that the cumulative amount of revenue recognised in respect of 
a contract at the end of a reporting period will not be subject to significant reversal when a matter is concluded. 

Page 32 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 33 

41

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.1.1 Accounting Policies (continued)

To determine the probability of success of a case using the expected value method, a level of judgement is required to 
be  applied  based  on  past  experience  and  historical  performance  of  similar  matters.  The  estimated  amount  of  variable 
consideration is based on the expected fee for the nature of the legal service provided with reference to internal historical 
fee levels and relative rates of successful and unsuccessful outcomes.

Where historical averages are not predictive of the probability of outcomes for a given contract, or where the Group has 
limited  historical  experience  with similar  contracts,  the  expected amount  of  variable  consideration is estimated using a 
most likely amount approach on a contract by contract basis. In such circumstances, a level of judgement is required to 
determine the likelihood of success of a given matter, as well as the estimated amount of fees that will be recovered in 
respect of the matter. 

In addition, when new businesses are acquired, there is a transition period during which time the Group’s practices and 
procedures are embedded into the operations of the new business. Therefore the valuation of work in progress acquired 
in a business combination may be adjusted during the period of provisional accounting for the acquisition.

(iii). Measuring the Stage of Completion

Revenue  is  recognised  when  control  of  a  service  is  transferred  to  the  customer.    The  Group  recognises  revenue  in 
respect  of personal  injury  matters  “over  time”  (as  opposed  to  at  a  “point  in  time”).    A  stage  of  completion  approach is 
used  to  measure  progress  towards  completion  of  the  performance  obligation.    The  stage  of  completion  is  determined 
using  a  milestones  based  approach  using  prescribed  status  codes  for  client  matters  as  the  relevant  milestones.    The 
percentage  of  completion  is  determined  either  by  calculating  the  average  fee  received  for  matters  that  resolve  at  a 
particular status code as a percentage of the average fee received for matters that resolve at that status and any later 
status, or by use of defined completion allocations based on historical performance.  

3.1.2. Disaggregation of Revenue from Contracts with Customers

The  Group  derives  revenue  from  the  transfer  of  goods  and  services  over  time  and  at  a  point  in  time,  in  the  major 
product lines of Personal Injury Law and Litigation and Emerging Services and the geographical regions of Australia:

Year ended 30 June 2018

Type of contract:
Fixed price
Time and Materials

No Win – No Fee

Revenue from contracts with 
customers

Year ended 30 June 2017 Restated
Type of contract:
Fixed price
Time and Materials
No Win – No Fee

Revenue from contracts with 
customers

Personal Injury 
Law
$’000

Litigation and 
Emerging Services
$’000

-
-

150,831

150,831

-
-
147,832

147,832

664
8,327

(572)

8,419

433
17,066
16,142

33,641

Total

$’000

664
8,327

150,259

159,250

433
17,066
163,974

181,473

Slater and Gordon Limited

42

Page 34 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.1.1 Accounting Policies (continued)

To determine the probability of success of a case using the expected value method, a level of judgement is required to 

be  applied  based  on  past  experience  and  historical  performance  of  similar  matters.  The  estimated  amount  of  variable 

consideration is based on the expected fee for the nature of the legal service provided with reference to internal historical 

fee levels and relative rates of successful and unsuccessful outcomes.

Where historical averages are not predictive of the probability of outcomes for a given contract, or where the Group has 

limited  historical  experience  with similar  contracts,  the  expected amount  of  variable  consideration is estimated using a 

most likely amount approach on a contract by contract basis. In such circumstances, a level of judgement is required to 

determine the likelihood of success of a given matter, as well as the estimated amount of fees that will be recovered in 

respect of the matter. 

In addition, when new businesses are acquired, there is a transition period during which time the Group’s practices and 

procedures are embedded into the operations of the new business. Therefore the valuation of work in progress acquired 

in a business combination may be adjusted during the period of provisional accounting for the acquisition.

(iii). Measuring the Stage of Completion

Revenue  is  recognised  when  control  of  a  service  is  transferred  to  the  customer.    The  Group  recognises  revenue  in 

respect  of personal  injury  matters  “over  time”  (as  opposed  to  at  a  “point  in  time”).    A  stage  of  completion  approach is 

used  to  measure  progress  towards  completion  of  the  performance  obligation.    The  stage  of  completion  is  determined 

using  a  milestones  based  approach  using  prescribed  status  codes  for  client  matters  as  the  relevant  milestones.    The 

percentage  of  completion  is  determined  either  by  calculating  the  average  fee  received  for  matters  that  resolve  at  a 

particular status code as a percentage of the average fee received for matters that resolve at that status and any later 

status, or by use of defined completion allocations based on historical performance.  

3.1.2. Disaggregation of Revenue from Contracts with Customers

The  Group  derives  revenue  from  the  transfer  of  goods  and  services  over  time  and  at  a  point  in  time,  in  the  major 

product lines of Personal Injury Law and Litigation and Emerging Services and the geographical regions of Australia:

Year ended 30 June 2018

Type of contract:

Fixed price

Time and Materials

No Win – No Fee

Revenue from contracts with 

customers

Year ended 30 June 2017 Restated

Type of contract:

Fixed price

Time and Materials

No Win – No Fee

Revenue from contracts with 

customers

Personal Injury 

Law

$’000

Litigation and 

Emerging Services

$’000

-

-

-

-

150,831

150,831

147,832

147,832

664

8,327

(572)

8,419

433

17,066

16,142

33,641

Total

$’000

664

8,327

150,259

159,250

433

17,066

163,974

181,473

3.2.

Expenses

3.2.1. Accounting Policies

Interest

After  initial  recognition,  interest-bearing loans  and  borrowings  are  subsequently  measured  at  amortised  cost  using  the 
effective  interest  method.  Amortised  cost  is  calculated  by  taking  into  account  any  issue  costs,  and  any  discount  or 
premium on settlement.

Depreciation

The  depreciable  amounts  of  all  property,  plant  and  equipment,  excluding  land,  are  depreciated  over  their  estimated 
useful lives, commencing from the time the asset is held ready for use. Leased assets are depreciated over the shorter of 
the lease term and their useful lives unless it is reasonably certain that the Group will obtain ownership by the end of the 
lease term. Land is not depreciated.

The depreciation rates used for each class of assets are:

Class of Fixed Asset

Plant and equipment

Low value asset pool

Amortisation

Depreciation Rates

Depreciation Method

5.00 – 66.67%

18.75 – 37.50%

Straight Line and Diminishing Value

Diminishing Value

Amortisation is calculated using a straight-line method to allocate the cost of intangible assets over their estimated useful 
lives.  Amortisation commences when the intangible asset is available for use.

Software  development  costs  have  been  assessed  as  having  a  finite  useful  life  and  once  operating  in  the  Group  are 
amortised over the useful life of 3 years. Trademarks, prior to their full impairment during the prior year, that have been 
assessed as having a finite useful life were amortised over the useful life of 3 years.

Share Based Payments

The accounting policy for share based payments is included in Note 5.6.

3.2.2. Expense Analysis by Nature

Finance costs expense
Interest and fees on bank overdraft and loans (includes costs of borrowing)
Interest on deferred consideration payable to vendor on acquisitions
Interest on onerous leases
Interest on obligations under hire purchases

Salaries and employee benefit expense
Wages and salaries
Post-employment benefits
Redundancy costs
Share based payments expense

Depreciation and Amortisation
Property, plant & equipment
Software development
Trademarks

2018
$’000
15,941
5
109
316

16,371

87,410
7,044
2,636
(42)

97,048

3,687
23
-

3,710

Restated(1)
2017
$’000
18,878
96
-
404

19,378

107,306
8,551
-
1,096

116,953

3,720
1,567
201

5,488

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 34 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 35 

43

(1) The prior year comparative has been restated in accordance with the requirements of the Australian Accounting Standards as a result of the discontinued operations.

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.3.

Cash Flow Information

Reconciliation of profit for the period to cash flows from operating activities
Profit / (loss) after income tax
Non-cash flows in profit from ordinary activities
Notional interest on VCR share loans
Depreciation and amortisation
Impairment of intangibles
Share based payment expenses
Accrual for payments to former owners
Notional interest on deferred consideration
Bad and doubtful debts
Non-cash net gain on disposal of discontinued operations
Deferred costs of borrowing
Notional FX (gain) / loss
Interest Rate Swap Expense
Interest Expense Capitalised
Other non-cash items

Items shown in investing activities
Costs associated with the Scheme
Costs associated with acquisition
Proceeds from disposal of businesses

Changes in assets and liabilities
Decrease / (increase) in receivables
Decrease / (increase) in other assets
Decrease in work in progress
(Decrease) in payables
Decrease / (increase) in income tax payable
(Decrease) / increase in net deferred tax
(Decrease) in derivatives
(Decrease) in other liabilities
(Decrease) in vendor liabilities
Increase / (decrease) in provisions

Cash flows used in operating activities

2018
$’000
113,730

-
6,386
-
2,182
-
-
11,612
(197,093)
-
(1,402)
-
29,958
-

5,515
-
-

32,717
5,182
20,001
(30,033)
(2,108)
(17,285)
(1,677)
(1,840)
-
(24,087)

(48,242)

2017
$’000
(546,831)

(859)
11,228
361,265
7,720
4,453
96
47,885
-
12,313
(1,354)
566
31,404
(3,106)

-
3
(3)

(2,234)
3,511
52,323
(33,944)
15,435
(1,183)
-
-
(189)
2,413

(39,088)

Slater and Gordon Limited

44

Page 36 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.3.

Cash Flow Information

Reconciliation of profit for the period to cash flows from operating activities

Profit / (loss) after income tax

Non-cash flows in profit from ordinary activities

Notional interest on VCR share loans

Depreciation and amortisation

Impairment of intangibles

Share based payment expenses

Accrual for payments to former owners

Notional interest on deferred consideration

Bad and doubtful debts

Non-cash net gain on disposal of discontinued operations

Deferred costs of borrowing

Notional FX (gain) / loss

Interest Rate Swap Expense

Interest Expense Capitalised

Other non-cash items

Items shown in investing activities

Costs associated with the Scheme

Costs associated with acquisition

Proceeds from disposal of businesses

Changes in assets and liabilities

Decrease / (increase) in receivables

Decrease / (increase) in other assets

Decrease in work in progress

(Decrease) in payables

Decrease / (increase) in income tax payable

(Decrease) / increase in net deferred tax

(Decrease) in derivatives

(Decrease) in other liabilities

(Decrease) in vendor liabilities

Increase / (decrease) in provisions

Cash flows used in operating activities

113,730

(546,831)

2018

$’000

6,386

2,182

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

11,612

(197,093)

(1,402)

29,958

5,515

32,717

5,182

20,001

(30,033)

(2,108)

(17,285)

(1,677)

(1,840)

(24,087)

(48,242)

2017

$’000

(859)

11,228

361,265

7,720

4,453

96

47,885

-

12,313

(1,354)

566

31,404

(3,106)

-

3

(3)

(2,234)

3,511

52,323

(33,944)

15,435

(1,183)

-

-

(189)

2,413

(39,088)

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.4.

Income and Other Taxes 

3.4.1. Accounting Policies 

Income and other taxes consist of income tax, Goods and Services Tax and Value Added Tax.

Current  income  tax  expense  or  benefit  for  the  current  and  prior  periods  is  measured  at  the  amount  expected  to  be 
recovered from or paid to the tax authorities. The current income tax charge is calculated on the basis of the tax laws 
enacted or substantively enacted at the end of the reporting period in the countries where the Group operates.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised for temporary differences at the applicable tax rates when the assets 
are  expected  to  be  recovered  or  liabilities  are  settled.  Deferred  tax  liabilities  are  not  recognised  if  they  arise  from  the 
initial  recognition  of  goodwill.  Deferred  tax  is  also  not  accounted  for  if  it  arises  from  initial  recognition  of  an  asset  or 
liability in a transaction, other than a business combination, and at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting 
nor taxable profit or loss.

Deferred tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date and are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that 
the  related  tax  benefit  will  be  realised.  Unrecognised  deferred  tax  assets  are  reassessed  at  each  reporting  date  and 
recognised to the extent that it has become probable that future taxable profits will be available against which they can 
be used. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the year when the asset is 
realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted at 
the reporting date.

Current  and  deferred  tax  for  the  year  are  recognised  in  profit  or  loss,  except  when  they  relate  to  items  that  are 
recognised  in  other  comprehensive  income  or  directly  in  equity,  in  which  case  the  current  and  deferred  tax  are  also 
recognised  in  other  comprehensive  income  or  directly  in  equity  respectively.  Where  current  tax  or  deferred  tax  arises 
from  the  initial  accounting  for  a  business  combination,  the  tax  effect  is  included  in  the  accounting  for  the  business 
combination.

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements

Deferred  tax  assets  and  liabilities  are  based  on  the  assumption  that  no  adverse  change  will  occur  in  the  income  tax 
legislation both in Australia and the UK and the anticipation that the Group will derive sufficient future assessable income 
to enable the benefit to be realised and comply with the conditions of deductibility imposed by the law.

Deferred  tax  assets  are  recognised  only  if  management  considers  it  is  probable  that  future  taxable  amounts  will  be 
available to utilise those temporary differences and losses.

Goods and Services Tax (“GST”) and Value Added Tax (“VAT”)

Revenue, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of GST/VAT, except where the GST/VAT incurred is 
not recoverable from the Australian Taxation Office (“ATO”), UK Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (“HMRC”) or Malta 
Inland  Revenue  (“MIR”)  and  is  therefore  recognised  as  part  of  the  asset’s  cost  or  as  part  of  the  expense  item. 
Receivables and payables are stated inclusive of GST/VAT.

The net amount of GST/VAT recoverable from, or payable to, the ATO/HMRC/MIR is included as part of receivables or 
payables in the consolidated statement of financial position.

3.4.2.

Income Tax Expense

The major components of income tax expense are:

Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income – profit 
or loss
Current income tax (benefit) / expense
Adjustment for current tax (benefit) / expense relating to prior periods
Deferred income tax (benefit) / expense relating to the origination and reversal of 
temporary differences

Income tax (benefit) 

Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income – OCI
Deferred tax credit arising on revaluation of cash flow hedges
Deferred tax credit arising on foreign exchange gain on revaluation of loans

Income tax recognised directly in equity
Current tax credit on share issue costs

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 36 

Slater and Gordon Limited

2018
$’000
1,226
(402)

(17,260)

(16,436)

-
-

-

-

-

2017
$’000 
3,636
364

(8,318)

(4,318)

266
105

371

-

-

Page 37 

45

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.4.2.

Income Tax Expense (continued)

Deferred income tax (benefit) /expense included in income tax expense:
(Increase)/decrease in deferred tax assets
Deferred income tax credit relating to items charged to OCI
(Decrease) in deferred tax liabilities
Change in tax rates
Deferred tax (benefit) / expense from prior periods
Derecognition of deferred tax asset on tax losses
(Derecognition) of deferred tax liability on impairment of brand names

The prima facie tax payable on profit before tax differs from the income tax expense 
as follows:
Accounting (loss) before tax of continuing operations
Profit/(loss) before tax of discontinued operations

Total accounting profit / (loss) before tax

At the Australian statutory income tax rate of 30% (2017: 30%)

Non-deductible expenses
Non-assessable income
Adjustments in respect to prior periods
Difference in overseas tax rate
Utilisation of tax losses and reversal of short term timing differences on which no deferred 
tax asset was previously recognised
Deferred tax charged at lower rate
Change in tax rates on deferred tax balances
Write off of deferred tax liability on impairment of brand names
Deferred tax assets not recognised
Tax benefit on scheme transaction
Group relief (claimed)/surrendered

Income tax (benefit)

3.4.3. Recognised Tax Assets and Liabilities

Current tax assets
Balance at the beginning of the year
Tax refunded
Adjustments in respect to prior periods
Disposal of UK operations
Exchange differences

Balance at the end of the year

2018
$’000

2017
$’000 

(5,831)
-
(10,526)
-
(903)
-
-

(17,260)

(29,238)
126,532

97,294
29,188

148,126
(136,147)
(1,305)
(66,655)

(305)
-
-
-
17,503
(7,428)
587

(16,436)

(15,483)
(371)
(9,836)
(945)
882
25,362
(7,927)

(8,318)

(96,269)
(454,880)

(551,149)
(165,344)

74,929
(872)
1,246
45,508

2,833
1,156
(945)
(7,927)
45,098
-
-

(4,318)

2018
$’000

2017
$’000

3
-
-
(3)
-

-

16,803
(16,138)
(2)
-
(660)

3

Slater and Gordon Limited

46

Page 38 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.4.2.

Income Tax Expense (continued)

3.4.3. Recognised Tax Assets and Liabilities (continued)

Deferred income tax (benefit) /expense included in income tax expense:

(Increase)/decrease in deferred tax assets

Deferred income tax credit relating to items charged to OCI

(Decrease) in deferred tax liabilities

Change in tax rates

Deferred tax (benefit) / expense from prior periods

Derecognition of deferred tax asset on tax losses

(Derecognition) of deferred tax liability on impairment of brand names

The prima facie tax payable on profit before tax differs from the income tax expense 

as follows:

Accounting (loss) before tax of continuing operations

Profit/(loss) before tax of discontinued operations

Total accounting profit / (loss) before tax

At the Australian statutory income tax rate of 30% (2017: 30%)

Utilisation of tax losses and reversal of short term timing differences on which no deferred 

Non-deductible expenses

Non-assessable income

Adjustments in respect to prior periods

Difference in overseas tax rate

tax asset was previously recognised

Deferred tax charged at lower rate

Change in tax rates on deferred tax balances

Write off of deferred tax liability on impairment of brand names

Deferred tax assets not recognised

Tax benefit on scheme transaction

Group relief (claimed)/surrendered

Income tax (benefit)

3.4.3. Recognised Tax Assets and Liabilities

Current tax assets

Balance at the beginning of the year

Tax refunded

Adjustments in respect to prior periods

Disposal of UK operations

Exchange differences

Balance at the end of the year

2018

$’000

(5,831)

(10,526)

(903)

(17,260)

(29,238)

126,532

97,294

29,188

148,126

(136,147)

(1,305)

(66,655)

(305)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

17,503

(7,428)

587

2017

$’000 

(15,483)

(371)

(9,836)

(945)

882

25,362

(7,927)

(8,318)

(96,269)

(454,880)

(551,149)

(165,344)

74,929

(872)

1,246

45,508

2,833

1,156

(945)

(7,927)

45,098

-

-

(16,436)

(4,318)

2018

$’000

2017

$’000

3

-

-

-

-

(3)

16,803

(16,138)

(2)

-

3

(660)

Current tax liability
Balance at the beginning of the year
Current income tax benefit/(expense)
Tax paid
Adjustments in respect of prior periods
Disposal of UK operations

Balance at the end of the year

Deferred tax assets
Provision for impairment
Employee benefits
Provision for legal costs
Accruals
Non-deducted business related costs
Fair value of cash flow hedges 
Unrendered WIP and disbursements not yet deducted
Other
Property, plant and equipment
Revenue losses carried forward
Advanced Company Income Tax (“ACIT”) refund in Malta

Total

Transfer deferred tax assets balance to deferred tax liabilities

Balance at the end of the year

Deferred tax liabilities
Prepayments
Work in progress
Unrendered disbursements
Intangibles/Goodwill 
Foreign currency translation reserve
Other

Total

Transfer of deferred tax assets balance 

Net deferred tax liability balance at the end of the year

3.4.4. Unrecognised Deferred Tax Assets

2018
$’000

(8,250)
-
-
-
8,250

-

2018
$’000

5,747
5,360
1,276
4,176
3,508
-
7,428
2,812
2,459
-
-

2017
$’000

(9,301)
(3,636)
5,051
(364)
-

(8,250)

2017
$’000

5,532
6,828
896
9,818
487
256
-
1,282
2,630
696
6,293

32,766

(32,766)

34,718

-

-

34,718

(371)
(67,778)
(13,458)
(755)
-
65

(82,297)

32,766

(49,531)

(971)
(72,227)
(13,689)
-
(6,529)
55

(93,361)

-

(93,361)

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 38 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Franking credits available
Franking credits  at  year  end  are  adjusted  for  credits  arising  from  payment  of 
provision for income tax and after deducting franking credits to be used in payment 
of proposed dividends:

2018
$’000

2017
$’000

-

-

Page 39 

47

At 30 June 2018 the Group has unrecognised deferred tax assets of $104.9m (2017: $160.8m) relating to unrecognised 
tax losses. 

3.5.

Dividends

No interim or final dividend was paid, declared or proposed for the years ended 30 June 2018 or 30 June 2017. 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.6.

Earnings / (loss) per Share

The following reflects the loss and share data used in the calculations of basic and diluted loss per share:

(Loss) used in calculating basic and diluted earnings / (loss) per share from 
continuing operations

Gain / (loss) used in calculating basic and diluted earnings / (loss) per share
from discontinued operations

Weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating basic 
earnings / (loss) per share (‘000’s)

Adjusted weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating 
diluted earnings / (loss) per share (‘000’s)

2018     
$’000

2017     
$’000

(31,916)

(74,459)

145,642

(472,090)

37,859

37,859

3,517

3,517

On 8 December 2017, the Company undertook a share consolidation of 1 ordinary share for every 100 on issue (refer 
Note  5.5). The  number  of  shares  used  in  calculating  basic  and  diluted  earnings /  (loss) per  share  has  been  adjusted 
retrospectively for the periods presented.

Note 4: Assets and Liabilities  

This  section shows  the  assets  used  to  generate  the  Group’s  revenue  and  the  liabilities  incurred  as  a  result.  Liabilities 
relating to the Group’s financing activities are disclosed in Note 5. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are disclosed in Note 
3.4.

On the following pages there are notes covering intangible assets, working capital, work in progress, other non-current 
assets, payables and provisions.

4.1.

Intangible Assets 

4.1.1. Accounting Policies

Goodwill

Goodwill  was initially  measured  at  cost  (being  the  excess  of  the  aggregate  of  the  consideration  transferred  and  the 
amount recognised for non-controlling interests) and any previous interest held over the net identifiable assets acquired 
and liabilities assumed.

Goodwill was  not  amortised,  but  was  tested  annually  for  impairment  or  more  frequently  if  events  or  changes  in 
circumstances indicated that it might be impaired. Prior to being fully impaired in the prior year, goodwill was carried at 
cost less any accumulated impairment losses. 

Software Development Costs

Expenditure on research activities is recognised as an expense in the period in which it is incurred.

Development costs are capitalised when it is probable that the project will be a success considering its commercial and 
technical feasibility; the entity is able to use or sell the asset; the entity has sufficient resources and intent to complete
the  development  and  its  costs  can  be  measured  reliably.  Capitalised  development  expenditure  is  stated  at  cost  less 
accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses. 

Slater and Gordon Limited

48

Page 40 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

3.6.

Earnings / (loss) per Share

The following reflects the loss and share data used in the calculations of basic and diluted loss per share:

4.1.1 Accounting Policies (continued)

Trademarks and Brand Names

(Loss) used in calculating basic and diluted earnings / (loss) per share from 

continuing operations

Gain / (loss) used in calculating basic and diluted earnings / (loss) per share

from discontinued operations

Weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating basic 

earnings / (loss) per share (‘000’s)

Adjusted weighted average number of ordinary shares used in calculating 

diluted earnings / (loss) per share (‘000’s)

2018     

$’000

2017     

$’000

(31,916)

(74,459)

145,642

(472,090)

37,859

37,859

3,517

3,517

On 8 December 2017, the Company undertook a share consolidation of 1 ordinary share for every 100 on issue (refer 

Note  5.5). The  number  of  shares  used  in  calculating  basic  and  diluted  earnings /  (loss) per  share  has  been  adjusted 

retrospectively for the periods presented.

Note 4: Assets and Liabilities  

This  section shows  the  assets  used  to  generate  the  Group’s  revenue  and  the  liabilities  incurred  as  a  result.  Liabilities 

relating to the Group’s financing activities are disclosed in Note 5. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are disclosed in Note 

On the following pages there are notes covering intangible assets, working capital, work in progress, other non-current 

3.4.

assets, payables and provisions.

4.1.

Intangible Assets 

4.1.1. Accounting Policies

Goodwill

and liabilities assumed.

Goodwill  was initially  measured  at  cost  (being  the  excess  of  the  aggregate  of  the  consideration  transferred  and  the 

amount recognised for non-controlling interests) and any previous interest held over the net identifiable assets acquired 

Goodwill was  not  amortised,  but  was  tested  annually  for  impairment  or  more  frequently  if  events  or  changes  in 

circumstances indicated that it might be impaired. Prior to being fully impaired in the prior year, goodwill was carried at 

cost less any accumulated impairment losses. 

Software Development Costs

Expenditure on research activities is recognised as an expense in the period in which it is incurred.

Development costs are capitalised when it is probable that the project will be a success considering its commercial and 

technical feasibility; the entity is able to use or sell the asset; the entity has sufficient resources and intent to complete

the  development  and  its  costs  can  be  measured  reliably.  Capitalised  development  expenditure  is  stated  at  cost  less 

accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses. 

Trademarks  acquired  in  a  business  combination  and  recognised  separately  from  goodwill  were initially  recognised  at 
their fair value at the acquisition date (which is regarded as their cost). The fair value of trademarks was based on the 
discounted estimated royalty payments that have been avoided as a result of the trademark being owned.

Prior  to  their  full  impairment  in  the  prior  year,  trademarks were carried  at cost  less accumulated amortisation  and  any 
accumulated impairment losses. 

Gross Cost
Accumulated amortisation
Accumulated impairment loss

At 30 June 2017

Gross Cost
Accumulated amortisation
Accumulated impairment loss

At 30 June 2018

Movement in carrying amounts
Balance at 1 July 2016
Additions
Reclassifications from property, plant and 
equipment 
Exchange differences
Amortisation expense
Impairment expense
Disposals

Balance at 30 June 2017

Disposal of UK operations
Additions
Reclassifications from property, plant and 
equipment 
Exchange differences
Amortisation expense
Impairment expense
Disposals

Balance at 30 June 2018

Software 
Development
$’000
41,605
(23,427)
(5,066)

Trademarks 
& Brand 
Names 
$’000
53,452
(12,199)
(41,253)

Assets in  
Course of 
Construction
$’000
-
-
-

Total
$’000
1,214,656
(35,626)
(1,165,918)

Goodwill
$’000
1,119,599
-
(1,119,599)

-

-
-
-

-

332,868
-

-
(17,922)
-
(314,946)
-

-

-
-

-
-
-
-
-

-

13,112

13,160
(7,839)
(5,066)

255

17,409
5,959

(52)
(790)
(4,068)
(5,066)
(280)

13,112

(12,186)
278

-
382
(1,331)
-
-

255

-

-
-
-

-

43,693
-

-
(2,313)
(127)
(41,253)
-

-

-
-

-
-
-
-
-

-

-

13,112

542
-
-

542

13,702
(7,839)
(5,066)

797

-
-

-
-
-
-
-

-

393,970
5,959

(52)
(21,025)
(4,195)
(361,265)
(280)

13,112

-
542

(12,186)
820

-
-
-
-
-

542

-
382
(1,331)
-
-

797

4.1.2.

Impairment Testing of Goodwill and Indefinite Life Intangible Assets

For  the  purposes  of  impairment  testing,  assets  are  grouped  at  the  lowest  levels  for  which  there  are  separately 
identifiable,  largely  independent  cash  inflows  (cash generating  units  “CGU’s”).  All goodwill  and indefinite  life  intangible 
assets were fully impaired in the prior year.

Impairment testing is completed at least annually for goodwill, intangible assets not yet ready for use and indefinite life 
intangible assets or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the asset may be impaired.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 40 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 41 

49

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

4.1.2 Impairment Testing of Goodwill and Indefinite Life Intangible Assets (continued)

An impairment loss is recognised where the carrying amount of the asset or CGU exceeds its recoverable amount. The 
recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is defined as the higher of its fair value less costs of disposal and value-in-use. 

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements

Determining whether goodwill is impaired requires an estimation of the value-in-use of the CGU’s to which goodwill has 
been  allocated.  The  value-in-use  calculation  requires management to estimate the  future  cash  flows expected to arise 
from the CGU and a post-tax discount rate that reflects the current market assessments of the time value of money and 
the  risks  specific  to  the  asset  in  order  to  calculate  present  value.  Where  the  actual  future  cash  flows  are  less  than 
expected, a material impairment loss may arise.

4.1.3.

Impairment Losses Recognised

As at 30 June 2018, the Group did not recognise an impairment expense (2017: $10,959,000).

4.2.

Receivables

4.2.1. Accounting Policies

Trade  receivables  are  amounts  due  from  customers  for  goods  sold  or  services  performed  in  the  ordinary  course  of 
business. Other receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted 
in an active market. If collection of the amounts is expected in one year or less they are classified as current assets. If 
not, they are presented as non-current assets.

Collectability of trade debtors is reviewed at each reporting period. Management considers whether further impairment of 
debtors is required based on the ageing profile and use calculated historical rates of recovery to determine the required 
impairment. Debts that are known to be uncollectible are written off when identified.

Disbursements are only recognised when it is assessed that a reimbursement will be received from the client or on his or 
her behalf. The disbursements are treated as a separate asset. The amount recognised for the expected reimbursement 
does not exceed the relevant costs incurred. The amount of any expected reimbursement is reduced by an allowance for 
non-recovery based on past experience.

Current
Trade receivables
Impairment of trade receivables

Disbursements
Allowance for non-recovery

Other receivables

Non-current
Disbursements
Allowance for non-recovery

Impairment of receivables 
Balance at beginning of the year
Receivables written off as uncollectible
Provision for impairment recognised
Release of provisions
Movement in provision for discount
Disposal of UK operations
Foreign exchange translation differences

Balance at end of the year

Slater and Gordon Limited

50

2018
$’000
49,078
(9,749)

39,329

31,473
(3,025)

28,448

2,721

70,498

28,510
(12,099)

16,411

(69,437)
9,125
(9,053)
-
-
59,616
-

(9,749)

2017
$’000
226,412
(69,437)

156,975

301,291
(65,694)

235,597

2,894

395,466

119,847
(28,355)

91,492

(92,824)
29,647
(7,114)
4,853
(9,126)
-
5,127

(69,437)

Page 42 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

4.1.2 Impairment Testing of Goodwill and Indefinite Life Intangible Assets (continued)

4.2.1.  Accounting Policies (continued)

An impairment loss is recognised where the carrying amount of the asset or CGU exceeds its recoverable amount. The 

recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is defined as the higher of its fair value less costs of disposal and value-in-use. 

As at 30 June, the ageing analysis of trade receivables is as follows:

Past due but not impaired

2018

2017(1)

Total

39,329

61,796

<30 days

30-60 days

61-90 days

91-180 days

>180 days

20,513

42,840

5,697

4,910

2,506

2,712

2,874

5,036

7,739

6,298

(1) 30 June 2017 was restated to only include Australia portion of the ageing of trade receivables past due but not impaired. Due to the divestment of the UK operations as part of the 

Recapitalisation, prior year comparatives have been amended to provide for better comparability.

See Note 5.4.4 regarding credit risk of trade receivables, which explains how the Group manages and measures credit 
quality of trade receivables. 

4.3. Work in Progress

4.3.1. Accounting Policies

Work in progress represents client cases which have not yet reached a conclusion and comprises personal injury cases, 
services  performed  ancillary  to  personal  injury  cases,  non-personal  injury  cases  and  project  litigation  cases.  Refer  to 
Note 3.1 for further details.

Contracts for legal services are billed based on time incurred. As permitted under AASB 15 Revenue from Contracts with 
Customers, the transaction price allocated to the unsatisfied or partially unsatisfied performance obligations under these 
contracts has not been disclosed.

The Group allocates work in progress between current and non-current classifications based on a historical analysis of 
the Group’s work in progress balances and velocity rates to determine expected timing of settlements. 

Current
Personal injury
Litigation and emerging services

Non-current
Personal injury
Litigation and emerging services

2018
$’000

2017
$’000

98,104
12,660

110,764

114,760
269

115,029

268,424
26,447

294,871

219,855
239

220,094

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements

Determining whether goodwill is impaired requires an estimation of the value-in-use of the CGU’s to which goodwill has 

been  allocated.  The  value-in-use  calculation  requires management to estimate the  future  cash  flows expected to arise 

from the CGU and a post-tax discount rate that reflects the current market assessments of the time value of money and 

the  risks  specific  to  the  asset  in  order  to  calculate  present  value.  Where  the  actual  future  cash  flows  are  less  than 

As at 30 June 2018, the Group did not recognise an impairment expense (2017: $10,959,000).

expected, a material impairment loss may arise.

4.1.3.

Impairment Losses Recognised

4.2.

Receivables

4.2.1. Accounting Policies

Trade  receivables  are  amounts  due  from  customers  for  goods  sold  or  services  performed  in  the  ordinary  course  of 

business. Other receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted 

in an active market. If collection of the amounts is expected in one year or less they are classified as current assets. If 

not, they are presented as non-current assets.

Collectability of trade debtors is reviewed at each reporting period. Management considers whether further impairment of 

debtors is required based on the ageing profile and use calculated historical rates of recovery to determine the required 

impairment. Debts that are known to be uncollectible are written off when identified.

Disbursements are only recognised when it is assessed that a reimbursement will be received from the client or on his or 

her behalf. The disbursements are treated as a separate asset. The amount recognised for the expected reimbursement 

does not exceed the relevant costs incurred. The amount of any expected reimbursement is reduced by an allowance for 

non-recovery based on past experience.

Current

Trade receivables

Impairment of trade receivables

Disbursements

Allowance for non-recovery

Other receivables

Non-current

Disbursements

Allowance for non-recovery

Impairment of receivables 

Balance at beginning of the year

Receivables written off as uncollectible

Provision for impairment recognised

Release of provisions

Movement in provision for discount

Disposal of UK operations

Foreign exchange translation differences

Balance at end of the year

2018

$’000

49,078

(9,749)

39,329

31,473

(3,025)

28,448

2,721

70,498

28,510

(12,099)

16,411

9,125

(9,053)

59,616

-

-

-

2017

$’000

226,412

(69,437)

156,975

301,291

(65,694)

235,597

2,894

395,466

119,847

(28,355)

91,492

29,647

(7,114)

4,853

(9,126)

-

5,127

(69,437)

(92,824)

(9,749)

(69,437)

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 42 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 43 

51

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

4.4.

Property, Plant and Equipment

4.4.1. Accounting Policies

Property,  plant and  equipment  is  measured  at  cost  less  accumulated  depreciation  and  any  accumulated  impairment 
losses.

An asset’s residual value and useful life is reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period. Any 
depreciation and impairment losses of an asset are recognised in profit or loss. 

Gains and losses on disposal are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses 
are included in profit or loss when the asset is derecognised.

Gross Cost
Less accumulated depreciation

At 30 June 2017

Gross Cost
Less accumulated depreciation

At 30 June 2018

Movement in carrying amounts
Balance at 1 July 2016
Additions
Exchange differences
Depreciation expense
Disposals

Balance at 30 June 2017

Additions

Exchange differences

Depreciation expense

Disposals

Disposal of UK Operations

Balance at 30 June 2018

Plant & 
Equipment
$’000

Land & 
Buildings
$’000

Low Value 
Asset Pool
$’000

77,624
(51,903)

25,721

31,462
(22,731)

8,731

32,172
1,858
(920)
(6,730)
(659)

25,721

3,985

515

(5,208)

(431)

(15,851)

8,731

249
-

249

-
-

-

265
-
(16) 
-
-

249

-

8

-

-

(257)

-

2,995
(2,410)

585

2,763
(2,122)

641

770
139
-
(303)
(21)

585

365
-

(248)

(61)

-

641

Total
$’000

80,868
(54,313)

26,555

34,225
(24,853)

9,372

33,207
1,997
(936)
(7,033)
(680)

26,555

4,350

523

(5,456)

(492)

(16,108)

9,372

The  carrying amount  of plant and  equipment  under  finance  lease included  above  amounted  to  $1,000 (30 June  2017:
$4,533,000).

Slater and Gordon Limited

52

Page 44 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Gross Cost

Less accumulated depreciation

At 30 June 2017

Gross Cost

Less accumulated depreciation

At 30 June 2018

Movement in carrying amounts

Balance at 1 July 2016

Additions

Exchange differences

Depreciation expense

Disposals

Balance at 30 June 2017

Additions

Exchange differences

Depreciation expense

Disposals

Disposal of UK Operations

Balance at 30 June 2018

$4,533,000).

$’000

77,624

(51,903)

25,721

31,462

(22,731)

8,731

32,172

1,858

(920)

(6,730)

(659)

25,721

3,985

515

(5,208)

(431)

(15,851)

8,731

$’000

249

249

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

8

-

-

-

265

(16) 

249

(257)

$’000

2,995

(2,410)

585

2,763

(2,122)

641

770

139

-

(303)

(21)

585

365

(248)

(61)

-

-

641

Total

$’000

80,868

(54,313)

26,555

34,225

(24,853)

9,372

33,207

1,997

(936)

(7,033)

(680)

26,555

4,350

523

(5,456)

(492)

(16,108)

9,372

The  carrying amount  of plant and  equipment  under  finance  lease included  above  amounted  to  $1,000 (30 June  2017:

Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

4.4.

Property, Plant and Equipment

4.4.1. Accounting Policies

losses.

Property,  plant and  equipment  is  measured  at  cost  less  accumulated  depreciation  and  any  accumulated  impairment 

An asset’s residual value and useful life is reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period. Any 

depreciation and impairment losses of an asset are recognised in profit or loss. 

Gains and losses on disposal are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses 

are included in profit or loss when the asset is derecognised.

Plant & 

Land & 

Equipment

Buildings

Low Value 

Asset Pool

4.5.

Payables

4.5.1. Accounting Policies

Trade creditors and accruals are carried at amortised cost and represent liabilities for goods and services provided to the 
Group prior to the end of the financial year that are unpaid and arise when the Group becomes obliged to make future 
payments in respect of the purchase of these goods and services.

Legal  creditors  are  carried  at  amortised  cost  and  represent  liabilities  in  relation  to  disbursements  where  there  is  an 
agreement with the vendor that payment will not be made by the Group, until the Group has received payment from any 
settlement proceeds on the matter.

Vendor  liabilities  are  carried  at  net  present  value  and  refer  to  deferred  consideration  payable  to  vendors  in  relation  to 
previous acquisitions.

Current
Unsecured liabilities
Trade creditors and accruals
Legal creditors
Vendor liabilities – acquisitions

4.6.

Provisions

4.6.1. Accounting Policies

2018
$’000

22,422
29,541
128

52,091

2017
$’000

150,026
268,009
584

418,619

Non-employee provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of 
past  events,  for  which  it  is  probable  that  an  outflow  of  economic  benefits  will  result  in  an  amount  that  can  be  reliably 
measured.

Solicitor Liability Claims – Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements

A provision for solicitor liability claims is made for the potential future cost of claims brought against the Group by former
clients. The provision relates to open claims and potential future claims as identified at the end of the reporting period. 
The provision is determined based on historical data, taking into account the nature of the existing claim, includes the 
estimated  maximum  amount  payable  by  the  Group  under  its  Professional  Indemnity  Insurance  Policy  on  all  claims 
notified to its insurer.

Employee Benefits

Liabilities arising in respect of wages and salaries, annual leave and any other employee benefits expected to be settled 
within  twelve  months  of  the  reporting  date  are  measured  at  the  amounts  based  on  remuneration  rates  which  are 
expected to be paid when the liability is settled. Liabilities arising later than one year have been measured at the present 
value of the estimated future cash outflows to be made for those benefits. These estimated future cash flows have been 
discounted using market yields, at the reporting date, on high quality corporate bonds with matching terms to maturity.

A bonus provision is recognised when it is payable in accordance with the employee’s contract of employment and the 
amount can be reliably measured. 

A provision for termination benefits is recognised when the entity can no longer withdraw the offer of those benefits, or if 
earlier,  when  the  termination  benefits  are  included  in  a  formal  restructuring  plan  that  has  been  announced  to  those 
affected by it. 

Employee benefit obligations are presented as current liabilities if the entity does not have an unconditional right to defer
settlement  for at  least  twelve months  after  the  reporting  date,  regardless  of  when  the  actual  settlement  is  expected  to 
occur.

Onerous Contracts

An onerous contract is a contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under the contract exceed 
the economic benefits expected to be received under it. The unavoidable costs are the lower of the cost of fulfilling the 
contract and any compensation or penalties arising from failure to fulfil the contract. The economic benefits expected to 
be received include direct and indirect benefits under the contract and contractual and non-contractual benefits.

A provision for onerous contracts is measured at the present value of the lower of the expected cost of terminating the 
contract and the expected net cost of continuing with the contract.  For leased premises, the provision also includes any 
costs associated with remediating the premises to the condition agreed in the contract. Before a provision is established, 
the Group recognises any impairment loss on the assets associated with that contract if applicable.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 44 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 45 

53

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

4.6.1.

Accounting Policies (continued)

Third Party disbursements

The Group has an agreement with a third party disbursement funder, who funds disbursements in respect of individual 
matters and is reimbursed out of any settlement proceeds on the matter. The Group has provided a financial guarantee 
to the funder for the repayment of clients’ obligations. The provision for third party disbursements reflects the value of 
clients’ obligations that are not expected to be recovered by the disbursement funder.

4.6.2. Provisions

Current
Employee benefits
Solicitor liability claims
Provision for third party disbursements
Provision for onerous contracts
Provision for payments to former owners
Other provisions

Non-current
Employee benefits
Provision for onerous contracts
Solicitor liability claims
Provision for dilapidations
Other provisions

4.7.

Fair Value Measurements

4.7.1. Accounting Policies

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements

2018
$’000
15,322
3,291
473
2,671
-
-

21,757

2,498
2,929
960
-
1,890

8,277

2017
$’000
19,176
12,479
880
5,294
5,550
11,153

54,532

3,429
3,286
-
7,475
6,982

21,172

When measuring the fair value of an asset or a liability, the Group uses observable market data as far as possible. Fair 
values are categorised into different levels in a fair value hierarchy based on the inputs used in the valuation techniques 
as follows:

•

•

•

Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the entity can access at the 
measurement date;

Level 2: inputs, other than quoted prices included within Level 1, that are observable for the asset or liability, either 
directly or indirectly; and

Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data.

If the inputs used to measure the fair value of an asset or a liability fall into different levels of the fair value hierarchy, then 
the fair value measurement is categorised in its entirety in the same level of the fair value hierarchy, as the lowest level 
input that is significant to the entire measurement. The fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities not measured 
at fair value approximates their carrying amounts as disclosed in the Statement of Financial Position and Notes to the 
Financial Statements.

Slater and Gordon Limited

54

Page 46 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Level 1
$’000

Level 2
$’000

Level 3
$’000

Total
$’000

-
-

-

-
-

-

-
-

-

-
-

-

Total
$’000

1,419

455

1,874

Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

4.6.1.

Accounting Policies (continued)

Third Party disbursements

The Group has an agreement with a third party disbursement funder, who funds disbursements in respect of individual 

matters and is reimbursed out of any settlement proceeds on the matter. The Group has provided a financial guarantee 

to the funder for the repayment of clients’ obligations. The provision for third party disbursements reflects the value of 

clients’ obligations that are not expected to be recovered by the disbursement funder.

4.7.2. Fair Value Hierarchy

30 June 2018
Recurring fair value measurements

Financial liabilities
Derivative financial instruments – interest rate swaps
Contingent consideration *

30 June 2017
Recurring fair value measurements

Level 1
$’000

Level 2
$’000

Level 3
$’000

Financial liabilities
Derivative financial instruments – interest rate swaps

Contingent consideration *

-

-

-

1,419

-

1,419

-

455

455

4.6.2. Provisions

Current

Employee benefits

Solicitor liability claims

Provision for third party disbursements

Provision for onerous contracts

Provision for payments to former owners

Other provisions

Non-current

Employee benefits

Provision for onerous contracts

Solicitor liability claims

Provision for dilapidations

Other provisions

4.7.

Fair Value Measurements

4.7.1. Accounting Policies

Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements

2018

$’000

15,322

3,291

473

2,671

21,757

-

-

-

2,498

2,929

960

1,890

8,277

2017

$’000

19,176

12,479

880

5,294

5,550

11,153

54,532

3,429

3,286

-

7,475

6,982

21,172

* Part of Vendor Liabilities which are included in Payables in the Statement of Financial Position

4.7.3. Valuation Techniques and Inputs used in Level 2 and 3 Fair Value Measurements

The fair value of the interest rate swaps is measured with reference to market data which can be used to estimate future 
cash  flows.  The  key  input  into  this  valuation  is  the  interest  rate  swap  revaluation  statement  as  provided  by  Westpac 
Banking Corporation and National Australia Bank. As at 30 June 2018, all interest rate swaps have been extinguished.

The  fair value  of  contingent  consideration  payable  in  prior  business  combinations  was  measured  with  reference  to 
current fee and performance forecasts which were used to estimate future cash flows. The key inputs into this valuation 
were the estimated future cash flows and the average discount rate of 9% was used to determine the present value of 
the future cash flows. As a 30 June 2018, there was no contingent consideration for prior business combinations. 

Note 5: Capital Structure and Financing  

This section outlines how the Group manages its capital structure and related financing costs, including its balance sheet 
liquidity and access to capital markets.

When measuring the fair value of an asset or a liability, the Group uses observable market data as far as possible. Fair 

values are categorised into different levels in a fair value hierarchy based on the inputs used in the valuation techniques 

5.1. Cash and Cash Equivalents

5.1.1. Accounting Policies

as follows:

•

•

•

measurement date;

directly or indirectly; and

Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the entity can access at the 

Level 2: inputs, other than quoted prices included within Level 1, that are observable for the asset or liability, either 

Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data.

If the inputs used to measure the fair value of an asset or a liability fall into different levels of the fair value hierarchy, then 

the fair value measurement is categorised in its entirety in the same level of the fair value hierarchy, as the lowest level 

input that is significant to the entire measurement. The fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities not measured 

at fair value approximates their carrying amounts as disclosed in the Statement of Financial Position and Notes to the 

Financial Statements.

Cash  and  cash  equivalents  comprise  cash  on  hand,  deposits  held  at  call  with  banks  and  short-term  deposits  with  an 
original maturity of three months or less. For the purposes of the consolidated statement of cash flows, cash and cash 
equivalents consist of cash and cash equivalents as defined above, net of outstanding banking overdrafts.

Cash  flows  are  presented  in  the  statement  of  cash  flows  on  a  gross  basis,  except  for  the  GST/VAT  component  of 
investing and financing activities, which are disclosed as operating cash flows. 

5.2.

Financing Arrangements

5.2.1. Accounting Policies

Borrowing Costs

Borrowing costs can include interest expense, finance charges in respect of finance leases, amortisation of discounts or 
premiums, ancillary costs relating to borrowings, and exchange differences arising from foreign currency borrowings to 
the extent that they are regarded as an adjustment to interest costs. 

Borrowing costs are expensed in the period which they are incurred, except for borrowing costs incurred as part of the 
cost of the construction of a qualifying asset which are capitalised until the asset is ready for its intended use or sale.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 46 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 47 

55

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.2.2. Financing Arrangements

Separation of UK operations 

On 6 December 2017, the Company’s shareholders approved a Recapitalisation of the Group with the implementation of 
a creditor’s Scheme of Arrangement (“the Senior Lender Scheme”). The Senior Lender Scheme was effective from 15 
December 2017 and implemented on 22 December 2017. The effect of the implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme 
on the financial performance and position of the Group is disclosed in Note 10.

The key outcomes of the Senior Lender Scheme were as follows:

Separation of UK operations 
Under  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme,  effective  from  15  December  2017,  all  UK  operations  and  UK  subsidiaries  were 
separated  from  the  Group  and  transferred  to  a  new  UK  holding  company  (“Slater  and  Gordon  UK  Holdings  Limited”). 
Slater and Gordon UK Holdings Limited is wholly owned by the Senior Lenders. Subsequently, the Group has ceased to 
have any equity interest in the UK operations or UK subsidiaries.

As consideration for the transfer of the UK operations, the Australian Group received:

a)

b)

A promissory  note  of  $40.0m,  which  was  applied  to  reduce outstanding  debt  under  the  Australian  Restated 
Syndicated Facility Agreement (no cash directly transferred) (see below for more information).

A right to receive the first $40.0m of net proceeds from Watchstone-related claims in the UK (refer Watchstone
Receivable  below  for  further  information).  This  amount  represents  a  contingent  asset  as  the  realisation  of 
income from the underlying Watchstone-related claims is not virtually certain (refer Note 7.3). 

c)  Assignment  to  Slater  and  Gordon  UK  Holdings  Limited  of  $1.3m of  intercompany  payables  owed  by  the 

Australian Group to the UK operations.

Immediately prior to the transfer of the UK operations, secured debt owed by the UK subsidiaries to the Senior Lenders 
of $674.2m was released. As partial consideration for this, S&G UK has issued interest-free convertible notes with a face 
value  of  £250.0m to  the  Senior  Lenders.  The  convertible  notes  entitle  the  holders  to  payment  of  any  amounts,  up  to 
£250.0m, received by S&G UK in respect of the net proceeds which may be received from successful settlement of the 
Watchstone-related claims. The payment entitlement under the convertible notes is after settlement of the Watchstone 
Receivable held by the Australian Group of $40.0m (refer below for more information) and repayment of the new Super 
Senior Facility of S&G UK, which has a facility limit of £14.8m.

Issue of shares in the Company to the Senior Lenders

Prior to implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme, the Company undertook a share consolidation of 1 ordinary share 
for every 100 on issue on 8 December 2017. On implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme, the Senior Lenders were 
issued with 66,050,874 shares in the Company, representing 95% of the equity of the Australian Parent Company. The 
Senior Lenders were also issued with 100% of the equity in a new company, Slater and Gordon UK Holdings Limited, 
which owns the UK operations that were separated from the Company as described above.

The number of shares in the Australian Parent Company issued to each Senior Lender within the Senior Lenders group 
was based on their commitments under the Super Senior Facility and Syndicated Facility Agreement. 

New Australian Debt Facilities 

Outstanding secured Australian debt has been permanently reduced by a combination of refinancing and restating debt. 

The debt facilities of the Company on implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme were as follows: 

a)

b)

Refinanced Super Senior Facility ($65.0m): Prior to implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme, the limit of 
this  facility  was  $40.0m,  which  was  fully  drawn  down.  The  facility  limit  was  increased  by  $25.0m  to  $65.0m 
under  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme.  The facility  has a  3  year  term  commencing  from  the  implementation  date 
(being 22 December 2017), with interest not payable until the end of the term. The facility is used for working 
capital purposes. The total undrawn amount of the facility is nil at 30 June 2018.

Restated  Syndicated  Facility  Agreement ($60.0m):  Prior  to  the  implementation  of  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme, 
the  total  balance  owing  under  the  Syndicated  Facility  Agreement  was  $125.6m.  The  balance  owing  was 
restated  to  $60.0m through  the  issuance  of  shares  in  the  Australian  Parent  Company  and  application  of  the 
promissory note of $40.0m (discussed above) received as consideration for the transfer of the UK operations. 
The balance owing was restated to $60.0m with the following key amendments: 

•

•

a 5 year term from the implementation date of the Senior Lender Scheme, and

interest is not payable until the end of the term.

Payment  of  the  deferred  restructure  fee  relating  to  the previous  restructure  of  the  facility in  May  2016, which 
comprised warrants and cash of $1.6m and GBP£5.3m, has been further deferred and is now due at the end of 
the new 5 year term.

c)  Existing lease facilities of less than $5.0m. 

Slater and Gordon Limited

56

Page 48 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.2.2. Financing Arrangements

Separation of UK operations 

On 6 December 2017, the Company’s shareholders approved a Recapitalisation of the Group with the implementation of 

a creditor’s Scheme of Arrangement (“the Senior Lender Scheme”). The Senior Lender Scheme was effective from 15 

December 2017 and implemented on 22 December 2017. The effect of the implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme 

on the financial performance and position of the Group is disclosed in Note 10.

The key outcomes of the Senior Lender Scheme were as follows:

Separation of UK operations 

Under  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme,  effective  from  15  December  2017,  all  UK  operations  and  UK  subsidiaries  were 

separated  from  the  Group  and  transferred  to  a  new  UK  holding  company  (“Slater  and  Gordon  UK  Holdings  Limited”). 

Slater and Gordon UK Holdings Limited is wholly owned by the Senior Lenders. Subsequently, the Group has ceased to 

have any equity interest in the UK operations or UK subsidiaries.

As consideration for the transfer of the UK operations, the Australian Group received:

a)

A promissory  note  of  $40.0m,  which  was  applied  to  reduce outstanding  debt  under  the  Australian  Restated 

Syndicated Facility Agreement (no cash directly transferred) (see below for more information).

b)

A right to receive the first $40.0m of net proceeds from Watchstone-related claims in the UK (refer Watchstone

Receivable  below  for  further  information).  This  amount  represents  a  contingent  asset  as  the  realisation  of 

income from the underlying Watchstone-related claims is not virtually certain (refer Note 7.3). 

c)  Assignment  to  Slater  and  Gordon  UK  Holdings  Limited  of  $1.3m of  intercompany  payables  owed  by  the 

Australian Group to the UK operations.

Immediately prior to the transfer of the UK operations, secured debt owed by the UK subsidiaries to the Senior Lenders 

of $674.2m was released. As partial consideration for this, S&G UK has issued interest-free convertible notes with a face 

value  of  £250.0m to  the  Senior  Lenders.  The  convertible  notes  entitle  the  holders  to  payment  of  any  amounts,  up  to 

£250.0m, received by S&G UK in respect of the net proceeds which may be received from successful settlement of the 

Watchstone-related claims. The payment entitlement under the convertible notes is after settlement of the Watchstone 

Receivable held by the Australian Group of $40.0m (refer below for more information) and repayment of the new Super 

Senior Facility of S&G UK, which has a facility limit of £14.8m.

Issue of shares in the Company to the Senior Lenders

Prior to implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme, the Company undertook a share consolidation of 1 ordinary share 

for every 100 on issue on 8 December 2017. On implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme, the Senior Lenders were 

issued with 66,050,874 shares in the Company, representing 95% of the equity of the Australian Parent Company. The 

Senior Lenders were also issued with 100% of the equity in a new company, Slater and Gordon UK Holdings Limited, 

which owns the UK operations that were separated from the Company as described above.

The number of shares in the Australian Parent Company issued to each Senior Lender within the Senior Lenders group 

was based on their commitments under the Super Senior Facility and Syndicated Facility Agreement. 

New Australian Debt Facilities 

Outstanding secured Australian debt has been permanently reduced by a combination of refinancing and restating debt. 

The debt facilities of the Company on implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme were as follows: 

a)

Refinanced Super Senior Facility ($65.0m): Prior to implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme, the limit of 

this  facility  was  $40.0m,  which  was  fully  drawn  down.  The  facility  limit  was  increased  by  $25.0m  to  $65.0m 

under  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme.  The facility  has a  3  year  term  commencing  from  the  implementation  date 

(being 22 December 2017), with interest not payable until the end of the term. The facility is used for working 

capital purposes. The total undrawn amount of the facility is nil at 30 June 2018.

b)

Restated  Syndicated  Facility  Agreement ($60.0m):  Prior  to  the  implementation  of  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme, 

the  total  balance  owing  under  the  Syndicated  Facility  Agreement  was  $125.6m.  The  balance  owing  was 

restated  to  $60.0m through  the  issuance  of  shares  in  the  Australian  Parent  Company  and  application  of  the 

promissory note of $40.0m (discussed above) received as consideration for the transfer of the UK operations. 

The balance owing was restated to $60.0m with the following key amendments: 

•

•

a 5 year term from the implementation date of the Senior Lender Scheme, and

interest is not payable until the end of the term.

Payment  of  the  deferred  restructure  fee  relating  to  the previous  restructure  of  the  facility in  May  2016, which 

comprised warrants and cash of $1.6m and GBP£5.3m, has been further deferred and is now due at the end of 

the new 5 year term.

c)  Existing lease facilities of less than $5.0m. 

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.2.2.  Financing Arrangements (continued)

Watchstone Receivable 

As noted above, as partial consideration for the transfer of S&G UK shares from the Company to Slater and Gordon UK 
Holdings Limited, the Company has recourse to the first $40.0m of any proceeds that S&G UK receives from successful 
settlement of the Watchstone-related claims (refer to Note 7.3). These are required to be applied by the Company first to 
reduce the  Super  Senior  Facility. This  amount  represents  a  contingent  asset,  and  has  not  been  recognised  as  a 
receivable as  the inflow  of  economic benefits  is  not  considered  virtually certain.  It  has  been  disclosed  as  a contingent 
asset (refer Note 7.3 for details).

Security

The security that was provided over the Australian Operations in respect of secured facilities of the UK Operations was 
released  in  full  on  implementation of  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme.  No  ongoing  security  has  been  provided  by  the 
Australian Group for UK debt. For details of other security provided to S&G UK by the Australian Operations, please refer 
Note 6.1.

Disbursement asset backed facility

In  June  2018  the  Company entered  into  a  disbursement  asset  backed  facility  with  an  external  funder.  The  initial
drawdown  on  the  facility occurred  on  29 June 2018  for $13,000,000.  Interest  on  the  facility  is  payable  annually  in 
advance. The facility is secured against disbursement assets (security pool). Future receipts of the security pool must be 
applied  in  repayment  of  the  facility  when  they  are  received,  accordingly  the  amount  classified  as  current  is  based  on 
expected  disbursement  repayments.  Any  outstanding  balance  is  fully  repayable  on  29  December  2020.  The  facility 
contains a redraw facility (maximum of $5,000,000) available until 30 September 2018, subject to the Company satisfying 
certain conditions.

Net Debt

As at 30 June 2018, the Group has fully drawn its Syndicated Facility Agreement and Super Senior Facility.

The  Group  has  cash  on  hand  of  $18,778,000  (30  June  2017:  $33,303,000),  offset  by debt  of  $143,701,000,  deferred 
restructure  and  underwriting  fees  of  $11,417,000  and  finance  lease  liability  of  $1,000  resulting  in  net  debt  of 
$136,341,000 (30  June  2017:  $747,700,000).  The  Group’s  net  debt  position  has  improved  since  30  June  2017  by
$611,359,000, primarily as a result of implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme.

Debt reconciliation

Super 
senior 
facility

Syndicated 
Facility 
Agreement

Debt 
raising 
costs 
under 
SFA
$'000 (1)

$'000

15,000

58,475

-

$'000

761,599

(749)

-

-

-

-

(9,013)

(735,744)

749

11,114

386

-

4,666

69,514

19,534

-

15,876

61,265

-

-

-

-

Fees

$'000

-

-

-

164

-

139

Disburseme
nt asset 
backed 
facility

Finance 
Lease 
Liability

Derivat
ives

$'000

-

12,922

-

-

-

-

-

$'000

5,092

-

$'000

1,419

-

(5,407)

(972)

Total

782,361

71,397

(6,379)

-

-

-

316

1

-

(732,894)

379

20,463

(826)

-

-

(826)

20,997

155,119

11,417

12,922

Balance at 1 July 2017 

Drawdowns

Repayments

Restated/extinguished as part 
of Senior Lender Scheme

Foreign currency translation 
movement

Changes in fair values 

Accrued interest

Balance at 30 June 2018

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 48 

Senior Lender Scheme.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 49 

57

(1) Relates to debt raising costs previously capitalised in the carrying amount of borrowings which were restated on extinguishment of related borrowings on implementation of the 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.2.3. Summary of Borrowing Arrangements

At reporting date, the following banking facilities had been executed and were available.

Total banking facilities
Bank overdrafts
Super senior facility
Syndicated facility agreement
Disbursement backed asset facility
Finance lease facility

Total credit facilities

Facilities utilised

Current

Disbursement asset backed facility
Super senior facility(1)
Underwriter fees
Debt raising costs (2)
Syndicated facility agreement(3)
Finance lease liability

Non-current

Disbursement asset backed facility
Super senior facility(3)
Deferred restructure fee
Syndicated facility agreement(3)
Finance lease liability

2018

$’000
-
65,000
60,000
13,000
1

138,001

8,519

1,678

1,600

-

-

1

11,798

4,403

67,836

9,817

61,265

-

143,321

2017

$’000
1,691
40,000
761,599
-
6,800

810,090

-

15,000

-

(749)

450,192

1,797

466,240

-

-

-

311,407

3,295

314,702

Maturity

Ongoing until 29 Dec 2020

24 Dec 2018

24 Dec 2018

2 Jul 2018

Ongoing until 29 Dec 2020

22 Dec 2020

22 Dec 2022

22 Dec 2022

(1) Includes accrued interest capitalised prior to Recapitalisation of $1,678,000 under current.

(2) As at 30 June 2017 this comprises the unamortised value of borrowing costs on establishment of $4.4m and refinance of net debt facilities of $(3.6m). 
These costs are deferred on the balance sheet and amortised to the Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income (Finance costs) over 
the earliest maturity date of the facility.

(3) Includes capitalised interest costs as agreed with the lenders.

A  portion  of  the  bills  of  exchange  was  the  subject  of  interest  rate  swaps  to  hedge  the  risk  of  an  adverse  interest  rate 
movement.  Hedging  was  discontinued  on  implementation  of  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme.  Refer  to  Note  5.4  for  more 
details. 

5.3. Leasing 

5.3.1.

Accounting Policies

The determination of whether an arrangement is or contains a lease is based on the substance of the arrangement at the 
inception of the lease and requires an assessment of whether the fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use 
of  a  specific  asset  or  assets  and  the  arrangement  conveys  a  right  to  use  the  asset,  even  if  the  right  is  not  explicitly 
specified in the arrangement.  The lease is classified at the inception date as a finance lease or an operating lease.

Finance Leases

A  lease  that  transfers  substantially  all  of  the  risks  and  rewards  incidental  to  ownership  to  the  Group  is  classified  as  a 
finance lease.

Finance leases are capitalised at the commencement of the lease, at the inception date fair value of the leased property 
or,  if  lower,  the  present  value  of  the  minimum  lease  payments.  Lease  payments  are  apportioned  between  finance 
charges and reduction of the lease liability so as to achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of the 
liability. Finance charges are recognised as finance costs in the Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive 
Income.  Leased  assets  are  depreciated  on  a  straight  line  basis  over  their  estimated  useful  lives  where  it  is  likely  the 
Group will obtain ownership of the asset, or if not, over the shorter of the estimated useful life of the asset and the term of 
the lease.

The Group leases a certain number of its fixed assets under finance leases. These were substantially settled during the 
year.

Slater and Gordon Limited

58

Page 50 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.2.3. Summary of Borrowing Arrangements

5.3.1

Accounting Policies (continued)

At reporting date, the following banking facilities had been executed and were available.

Future minimum rentals payable under finance leases as at 30 June are, as follows:

2018
$’000

2017
$’000

Minimum 
payments
1

Interest
-

Present 
value of 
payments
1

Minimum 
payments Interest
(256)

2,053

-

1

-

-

-

1

3,484

(189)

5,537

(445)

Present 
value of 
payments
1,797

3,295

5,092

Within one year

One year or later and not later than five years

Operating Leases

An  operating  lease  is  a  lease  other  than  a  finance  lease.  Operating  lease  payments  are  recognised  as  an  operating 
expense  in  the  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other  Comprehensive  Income on  a  straight-line  basis  over  the  lease 
term. Lease incentives under operating leases are recognised as a liability and amortised on a straight-line basis over 
the life of the lease.

Commitments  and  contingencies  are  disclosed  net  of  the  amount  of  GST/VAT  recoverable  from,  or  payable  to,  the 
relevant taxation authority.

Future minimum rentals payable under non-cancellable operating leases as at 30 June are, as follows:

Disbursement asset backed facility

Ongoing until 29 Dec 2020

Within one year
One year or later and not later than five years
Greater than five years

2018
$’000
13,525
24,531
8,250

46,306

2017
$’000
25,665
62,194
49,717

137,576

2018

$’000

65,000

60,000

13,000

-

1

138,001

8,519

1,678

1,600

-

-

1

11,798

4,403

67,836

9,817

61,265

-

143,321

2017

$’000

1,691

40,000

761,599

6,800

810,090

15,000

(749)

450,192

1,797

466,240

311,407

3,295

314,702

-

-

-

-

-

-

Maturity

24 Dec 2018

24 Dec 2018

2 Jul 2018

22 Dec 2020

22 Dec 2022

22 Dec 2022

Disbursement asset backed facility

Ongoing until 29 Dec 2020

Total banking facilities

Bank overdrafts

Super senior facility

Syndicated facility agreement

Disbursement backed asset facility

Finance lease facility

Total credit facilities

Facilities utilised

Current

Super senior facility(1)

Underwriter fees

Debt raising costs (2)

Syndicated facility agreement(3)

Finance lease liability

Non-current

Super senior facility(3)

Deferred restructure fee

Syndicated facility agreement(3)

Finance lease liability

details. 

5.3. Leasing 

5.3.1.

Accounting Policies

(1) Includes accrued interest capitalised prior to Recapitalisation of $1,678,000 under current.

(2) As at 30 June 2017 this comprises the unamortised value of borrowing costs on establishment of $4.4m and refinance of net debt facilities of $(3.6m). 

These costs are deferred on the balance sheet and amortised to the Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income (Finance costs) over 

the earliest maturity date of the facility.

(3) Includes capitalised interest costs as agreed with the lenders.

A  portion  of  the  bills  of  exchange  was  the  subject  of  interest  rate  swaps  to  hedge  the  risk  of  an  adverse  interest  rate 

movement.  Hedging  was  discontinued  on  implementation  of  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme.  Refer  to  Note  5.4  for  more 

The determination of whether an arrangement is or contains a lease is based on the substance of the arrangement at the 

inception of the lease and requires an assessment of whether the fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use 

of  a  specific  asset  or  assets  and  the  arrangement  conveys  a  right  to  use  the  asset,  even  if  the  right  is  not  explicitly 

specified in the arrangement.  The lease is classified at the inception date as a finance lease or an operating lease.

Finance Leases

finance lease.

the lease.

year.

A  lease  that  transfers  substantially  all  of  the  risks  and  rewards  incidental  to  ownership  to  the  Group  is  classified  as  a 

Finance leases are capitalised at the commencement of the lease, at the inception date fair value of the leased property 

or,  if  lower,  the  present  value  of  the  minimum  lease  payments.  Lease  payments  are  apportioned  between  finance 

charges and reduction of the lease liability so as to achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of the 

liability. Finance charges are recognised as finance costs in the Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive 

Income.  Leased  assets  are  depreciated  on  a  straight  line  basis  over  their  estimated  useful  lives  where  it  is  likely  the 

Group will obtain ownership of the asset, or if not, over the shorter of the estimated useful life of the asset and the term of 

The Group leases a certain number of its fixed assets under finance leases. These were substantially settled during the 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 50 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 51 

59

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.4.

Financial Risk Management

5.4.1.

Accounting Policies

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents, loans and receivables, trade payables 
and loans. The classification of financial instruments depends on the purpose for which the instruments were acquired. 
Management determines the classification of its financial instruments at initial recognition.

Financial Assets

Loans and receivables are non-interest bearing, non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that 
are  not  quoted  in  an  active  market.  The  loans  are  initially  recognised  based  on  fair  value  plus  directly  attributable 
transaction costs and are subsequently stated at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. 

Financial assets are tested for impairment at each financial year end to establish whether there is any objective evidence 
of impairment. 

For loans and receivables carried at amortised cost, impairment loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s 
carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows (excluding future credit losses that have not been 
incurred) discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. The amount of the loss reduces the carrying 
amount  of the  asset  and  is  recognised  in  profit  or  loss.  The  impairment  loss  is  reversed  through  profit  or  loss  if  the 
amount of the impairment loss decreases in a subsequent period and the decrease can be related objectively to an event 
occurring after the impairment was recognised. 

Non-Derivative Financial Liabilities

Non-derivative financial liabilities include trade payables, other creditors and loans from third parties including loans from 
or other amounts due to director-related entities. 

Non-derivative  financial  liabilities  are  recognised at  amortised  cost, comprising  original  debt,  net  of  directly  attributable 
transaction costs less principal payments and amortisation using the effective interest rate method.

Non-interest bearing financial liabilities for deferred cash consideration on the acquisition of acquired firms is measured 
at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. The implied interest expense is recognised in profit or loss.

Derivative Financial Instruments

The Group designates certain derivatives as either:

•

•

hedges of fair value of recognised assets or liabilities or a firm commitment (fair value hedges); or

hedges of highly probable forecast transactions (cash flow hedges).

During  the  period,  the  Group  only  had cash  flow  hedges,  relating  to  interest  rate  risk  management.  Hedging  was 
discontinued  from  the  date  of  implementation  of  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme due  to  the  extinguishment  of  the  hedged 
item. All related hedging instruments had been closed out as at 30 June 2018.

Cash Flow Hedge

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is 
recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in the hedge reserve which forms part of equity. The gain 
or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and 
Other Comprehensive Income.

Amounts accumulated in the hedge reserve in equity are transferred to profit or loss in the periods when the hedged item 
will affect profit or loss.

Slater and Gordon Limited

60

Page 52 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.4.

Financial Risk Management

5.4.1.

Accounting Policies

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents, loans and receivables, trade payables 

and loans. The classification of financial instruments depends on the purpose for which the instruments were acquired. 

Management determines the classification of its financial instruments at initial recognition.

Financial Assets

of impairment. 

Loans and receivables are non-interest bearing, non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that 

are  not  quoted  in  an  active  market.  The  loans  are  initially  recognised  based  on  fair  value  plus  directly  attributable 

transaction costs and are subsequently stated at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. 

Financial assets are tested for impairment at each financial year end to establish whether there is any objective evidence 

For loans and receivables carried at amortised cost, impairment loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s 

carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows (excluding future credit losses that have not been 

incurred) discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. The amount of the loss reduces the carrying 

amount  of the  asset  and  is  recognised  in  profit  or  loss.  The  impairment  loss  is  reversed  through  profit  or  loss  if  the 

amount of the impairment loss decreases in a subsequent period and the decrease can be related objectively to an event 

occurring after the impairment was recognised. 

Non-Derivative Financial Liabilities

Non-derivative financial liabilities include trade payables, other creditors and loans from third parties including loans from 

or other amounts due to director-related entities. 

Non-derivative  financial  liabilities  are  recognised at  amortised  cost, comprising  original  debt,  net  of  directly  attributable 

transaction costs less principal payments and amortisation using the effective interest rate method.

Non-interest bearing financial liabilities for deferred cash consideration on the acquisition of acquired firms is measured 

at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. The implied interest expense is recognised in profit or loss.

Derivative Financial Instruments

The Group designates certain derivatives as either:

•

•

hedges of fair value of recognised assets or liabilities or a firm commitment (fair value hedges); or

hedges of highly probable forecast transactions (cash flow hedges).

During  the  period,  the  Group  only  had cash  flow  hedges,  relating  to  interest  rate  risk  management.  Hedging  was 

discontinued  from  the  date  of  implementation  of  the  Senior  Lender  Scheme due  to  the  extinguishment  of  the  hedged 

item. All related hedging instruments had been closed out as at 30 June 2018.

Cash Flow Hedge

Other Comprehensive Income.

will affect profit or loss.

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is 

recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in the hedge reserve which forms part of equity. The gain 

or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and 

Amounts accumulated in the hedge reserve in equity are transferred to profit or loss in the periods when the hedged item 

5.4.2.

Interest Rate Risk

The Group's exposure to interest rate risk and the effective interest rates of non-derivative financial assets and financial 
liabilities both recognised and unrecognised at the end of the reporting period are as follows:

Variable interest rate

Fixed interest rate

2018
$’000

2017
$’000

2018
$’000

2017
$’000

Total

2018
$’000

2017
$’000

Financial assets
Cash and bank guarantees on 
deposit(1)
Total financial assets

Financial liabilities
Other current liabilities
Finance lease liability
Disbursement backed asset 
facility
Super senior facility
Debt raising costs under the SFA
Syndicated facility agreement

Total financial liabilities

22,711

22,711

-
-

-
-
-
61,265

61,265

33,303

33,303

1,815
-

-
15,000
-
674,312

691,127

-

-

-
1

12,922
69,514
9,817
-

92,254

-

-

22,711

22,711

-
5,092

-
-
-
87,287

92,379

-
1

12,922
69,514
9,817
61,265

153,519

33,303

33,303

1,815
5,092

-
15,000
-
761,599

783,506

(1) This includes cash and cash equivalents of $18,778,000 and restricted bank guarantees on deposit of $3,933,000.

Interest  rate  swap  transactions  were  entered  into  by  the  Group  to  exchange  variable  interest  payment  obligations  to 
fixed,  to  protect  long-term  borrowings  from  the  risk  of  increasing  interest  rates.  The  Group  used  swap  contracts  to 
maintain a designated proportion of fixed to floating debt until the date of capitalisation. Hedging was discontinued from 
the date of implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme due to the extinguishment of the hedged item. All swaps had 
been closed out as at 30 June 2018.

At the end of the reporting period, the details of outstanding contracts, all of which are to receive floating/pay-fixed 
interest rate swaps, are as follows:

Maturity of notional amounts

Effective average fixed interest 
rate payable

Notional principal value

0 to 2 years
2 to 5 years

2018
-
-

2017
2.39%
2.32%

2018
$’000
-
-

-

2017
$’000
68,830
18,457

87,287

Interest rate swaps were measured at fair value with gains and losses taken to the cash flow hedge reserve until such 
time as the profit or loss associated with the hedged risk is recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss 
and Other Comprehensive Income. The balance of the cash flow hedge reserve was reclassified from equity to profit or 
loss on discontinuation of hedge accounting on implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme and extinguishment of the 
hedged item.

Interest Rate Sensitivity

If interest rates were to increase/decrease by 100 basis points from rates used to determine fair values as at the end of 
the  reporting  period,  assuming  all  other  variables  that  might  impact  on  fair  value  remain  constant,  then  the  impact  on 
profit for the year and equity would be as follows:

+/- 100 basis points:
Impact on profit after tax
Impact on equity

2018
$’000

-
-

2017
$’000

-
1,168

As all borrowings at 30 June 2018 are measured at amortised cost and not fair value, any movement in interest rates 
does not impact the carrying value of those borrowings but would impact their related interest charges.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 52 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 53 

61

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.4.3. Foreign Exchange Risk

Foreign currency risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of
changes in foreign exchange rates. The Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk relates primarily to amounts payable in 
foreign currency (GBP£4,740,000 at 30 June 2018). The Group’s investment in the UK operations was transferred under 
the Senior Lender Scheme on 15 December 2017. The balance accumulated in the foreign currency translation reserve 
($17,104,000 gain) was reclassified from equity to profit or loss on transfer of the UK operations. 

The Group has no other significant exposures to foreign exchange risk.

Foreign Exchange Rate Sensitivity

If foreign exchange rates were to increase/decrease by 10 per cent from rates used to determine fair values as at the 
end of the reporting period, assuming all other variables that might impact on fair value remain constant, then the impact 
on profit for the year would be as follows:

Impact on profit after tax – 10% decrease in AUD/GBP exchange rate
Impact on profit after tax – 10% increase in AUD/GBP exchange rate

5.4.4. Credit Risk 

2018
$’000
(583)
530

2017
$’000
-
-

Credit risk arises from the financial assets of the Group. The main exposure to credit risk in the Group is represented by 
receivables (debtors and disbursements) owing to the Group. The Group’s exposure to credit risk arises from potential 
default of the counterparty, with a maximum exposure equal to the carrying amount of those assets as disclosed in the 
statement of financial position and notes to the financial statements.

The Group held cash and cash equivalents and restricted bank guarantees on deposit of $22,711,000 at 30 June 2018 
(30  June 2017:  $33,303,000).  The  credit  risk  associated  with  cash and cash  equivalents is considered minimal  as  the 
cash and cash equivalents are held with reputable financial institutions in Australia.

Receivables

There is also credit risk associated with unrendered disbursements and trade receivables. Once client matters are billed, 
a  significant  portion  of  receivables  related  to  the  personal  injuries  business  are  considered  low  risk.  This  is  because 
these receivables are collected directly from settlements paid by insurers into trust funds held on behalf of the Group’s 
clients. For  the  non-personal  injury  law  business,  the  Group  is  exposed  to  the  credit  risk  associated  with  the  client’s 
ability  to  meet  their  obligations  under  the  fee  and  retainer  agreement.  The  Group  minimises  the  concentration  of  this 
credit risk by undertaking transactions with a large number of clients.  

Management of Credit Risk

The Group actively manages its credit risk by:

•

•

assessing the capability of a client to meet its obligations under the fee and retainer agreement;

periodically reviewing the reasons for bad debt write-offs in order to improve the future decision making process;

• maintaining an adequate provision against the future recovery of debtors and disbursements;

•

•

including  in  practitioner’s  Key  Performance  Indicators  (“KPI’s”)  measurements  in  respect  of  debtor  levels,  recovery 
and investment in disbursements;

providing ongoing training to staff in the management of their personal and practice group debtor portfolios; and

• where  necessary,  pursuing  the  recovery  of  debts  owed  to the  Group  through  external  mercantile  agents  and  the 

courts.

Due to the nature of the “No Win No Fee” arrangements applicable to the majority of the legal matters managed by the 
Group  an  increase  in  the  required  processing  time  between  initiation  and settlement  and  an  increase  in  the  ageing  of 
receivables, particularly disbursements, does not always increase the associated credit risk.

Management performs periodic assessment of the recoverability of receivables, and provisions are calculated based on 
historical write-offs of the receivables as well as any known circumstances relating to the matters in progress.

Slater and Gordon Limited

62

Page 54 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.4.3. Foreign Exchange Risk

5.4.5. Liquidity Risk

Foreign currency risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of

changes in foreign exchange rates. The Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk relates primarily to amounts payable in 

foreign currency (GBP£4,740,000 at 30 June 2018). The Group’s investment in the UK operations was transferred under 

the Senior Lender Scheme on 15 December 2017. The balance accumulated in the foreign currency translation reserve 

($17,104,000 gain) was reclassified from equity to profit or loss on transfer of the UK operations. 

The Group has no other significant exposures to foreign exchange risk.

Foreign Exchange Rate Sensitivity

If foreign exchange rates were to increase/decrease by 10 per cent from rates used to determine fair values as at the 

end of the reporting period, assuming all other variables that might impact on fair value remain constant, then the impact 

on profit for the year would be as follows:

2018

$’000

(583)

530

2017

$’000

-

-

Impact on profit after tax – 10% decrease in AUD/GBP exchange rate

Impact on profit after tax – 10% increase in AUD/GBP exchange rate

5.4.4. Credit Risk 

Credit risk arises from the financial assets of the Group. The main exposure to credit risk in the Group is represented by 

receivables (debtors and disbursements) owing to the Group. The Group’s exposure to credit risk arises from potential 

default of the counterparty, with a maximum exposure equal to the carrying amount of those assets as disclosed in the 

statement of financial position and notes to the financial statements.

The Group held cash and cash equivalents and restricted bank guarantees on deposit of $22,711,000 at 30 June 2018 

(30  June 2017:  $33,303,000).  The  credit  risk  associated  with  cash and cash  equivalents is considered minimal  as  the 

cash and cash equivalents are held with reputable financial institutions in Australia.

Receivables

There is also credit risk associated with unrendered disbursements and trade receivables. Once client matters are billed, 

a  significant  portion  of  receivables  related  to  the  personal  injuries  business  are  considered  low  risk.  This  is  because 

these receivables are collected directly from settlements paid by insurers into trust funds held on behalf of the Group’s 

clients. For  the  non-personal  injury  law  business,  the  Group  is  exposed  to  the  credit  risk  associated  with  the  client’s 

ability  to  meet  their  obligations  under  the  fee  and  retainer  agreement.  The  Group  minimises  the  concentration  of  this 

credit risk by undertaking transactions with a large number of clients.  

Management of Credit Risk

The Group actively manages its credit risk by:

assessing the capability of a client to meet its obligations under the fee and retainer agreement;

periodically reviewing the reasons for bad debt write-offs in order to improve the future decision making process;

• maintaining an adequate provision against the future recovery of debtors and disbursements;

including  in  practitioner’s  Key  Performance  Indicators  (“KPI’s”)  measurements  in  respect  of  debtor  levels,  recovery 

and investment in disbursements;

providing ongoing training to staff in the management of their personal and practice group debtor portfolios; and

• where  necessary,  pursuing  the  recovery  of  debts  owed  to the  Group  through  external  mercantile  agents  and  the 

•

•

•

•

courts.

Due to the nature of the “No Win No Fee” arrangements applicable to the majority of the legal matters managed by the 

Group  an  increase  in  the  required  processing  time  between  initiation  and settlement  and  an  increase  in  the  ageing  of 

receivables, particularly disbursements, does not always increase the associated credit risk.

Management performs periodic assessment of the recoverability of receivables, and provisions are calculated based on 

historical write-offs of the receivables as well as any known circumstances relating to the matters in progress.

The  Group’s  objective  is  to  maintain  a  balance  between  the  continuity  of  funding  and  flexibility  through  the  use  of 
operating cash flows and committed available credit facilities. The Group actively reviews its funding position to ensure 
the available facilities are adequate to meet its current and anticipated needs.

The Group manages liquidity risk by monitoring forecast cash flows and ensuring that adequate borrowing facilities are 
maintained.  Refer  to  the  statement  of  cash  flows  and  Note  3.3  Cash  Flow  Information,  for  further  information  on  the 
historical  cash  flows.  Further  information  in  relation  to  bank  facilities  available  and  utilised  are  outlined  in  Note  5.2 
Financing Arrangements.

KPIs are set for practitioners relating to budgeted fee events, which are closely monitored by senior management.

Maturity Analysis

The  table below  represents  the  estimated and  undiscounted  contractual settlement  terms for  financial instruments and 
management’s  expectation  for  settlement  of  undiscounted  maturities. Cash  flows  for  floating  rate  financial  instruments 
have been presented based on the rate prevailing at the balance date.

2018
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Payables
Borrowings

Financial liability maturities

2017
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Payables
Borrowings
Other current liabilities

Financial liability maturities

< 12 Months
$’000
52,091
14,026

66,117

1-5 years
$’000
-
175,599

175,599

Total contractual 
cash flows
$’000
52,091
189,625

241,716

Carrying 
amount
$’000
52,091
155,119

207,210

418,619
499,121
1,815

919,555

-
322,287
-

322,287

418,619
821,408
1,815

418,619
780,942
1,815

1,241,842

1,201,376

Refer to Note 5.4.2 for the maturity analysis of interest rate swaps. 

5.4.6. Fair Value Risk  

The fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities not measured at fair value approximates their carrying amounts 
as disclosed in the statement of financial position and notes to the financial statements. 

The  Group  measures  its  interest  rate  swaps  at  fair  value.  These  fair  values  are  based  on  level  2  fair  value 
measurements, as defined in the fair value hierarchy in AASB 13 Fair Value Measurement with reference to market data 
which can be used to estimate future cash flows and discount them to present value. Management’s aim is to use and 
source this data consistently from period to period.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 54 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 55 

63

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.5.

Contributed Equity

Ordinary shares fully paid

Balance at the end of the year

Movement in Ordinary Share Capital

2018
Shares
69,527,235

2018
$’000
1,348,581

2017
Shares
347,245,601

69,527,235

1,348,581

347,245,601

2017
$’000
1,119,235

1,119,235

347,245,601
Balance at the beginning of the year                                                    

1,119,235

352,377,933

1,116,573

Issued during the year 
• EOP Share Buy Back
• Consolidation of share prior to

Recapitalisation(1)

• Issuance of shares under Senior Lender 

Scheme

• Equity Incentive Plan
• Transfer from share-based payment reserve
• Costs of share registry management
Balance at the end of the year

-

(343,769,240)

-

-

66,050,874
-
-
-

221,270
-
8,076
-

(5,132,332)

(9,232)

-

-
-
-
-

-

-
-
11,907
(13)

69,527,235

1,348,581

347,245,601

1,119,235

Total Share Capital balance at the end of the 
year

69,527,235

1,348,581

347,245,601

1,119,235

(1) On 8 December 2017, the Company undertook a share consolidation of 1 ordinary share for every 100 on issue.

Ordinary Shares

Ordinary shares participate in dividends and the proceeds on winding up of the Company in proportion to the number of 
shares held. At shareholders meetings each ordinary share is entitled to one vote when a poll is called, otherwise each 
shareholder has one vote on a show of hands.

During the financial year ended 30 June 2018, the Company did not pay a dividend (30 June 2017: $Nil).

5.6.

Share-Based Payment Arrangements 

5.6.1. Accounting Policies

Equity-settled share-based payments to employees and others providing similar services are measured at the fair value 
of the equity instruments at the grant date.

The consolidated entity operates share-based payment employee share and option schemes. The fair value of the equity 
to which employees become entitled is measured at grant date and recognised as an expense over the vesting period, 
with  a  corresponding  increase  to  an  equity  account.  In  respect  of  share-based  payments  that  are  dependent  on  the 
satisfaction of performance conditions, the number of shares and options expected to vest is reviewed and adjusted at 
each reporting date. The amount recognised for services received as consideration for these equity instruments granted 
is adjusted to reflect the best estimate of the number of equity instruments that eventually vest.

Equity-settled share-based payment transactions with parties other than employees are measured at the fair value of the 
goods or services received, except where that fair value cannot be estimated reliably, in which case they are measured 
at the fair value of the equity instruments granted, measured at the date the entity obtains the goods or the counterparty
renders the service.

Slater and Gordon Limited

64

Page 56 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Balance at the beginning of the year                                                    

347,245,601

1,119,235

352,377,933

1,116,573

Ordinary shares fully paid

Balance at the end of the year

Movement in Ordinary Share Capital

Issued during the year 

• EOP Share Buy Back

• Consolidation of share prior to

Recapitalisation(1)

• Issuance of shares under Senior Lender 

Scheme

• Equity Incentive Plan

• Transfer from share-based payment reserve

• Costs of share registry management

2018

Shares

2018

$’000

2017

Shares

69,527,235

1,348,581

347,245,601

69,527,235

1,348,581

347,245,601

2017

$’000

1,119,235

1,119,235

(343,769,240)

66,050,874

221,270

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

8,076

(5,132,332)

(9,232)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

11,907

(13)

Balance at the end of the year

69,527,235

1,348,581

347,245,601

1,119,235

(1) On 8 December 2017, the Company undertook a share consolidation of 1 ordinary share for every 100 on issue.

Ordinary Shares

Ordinary shares participate in dividends and the proceeds on winding up of the Company in proportion to the number of 

shares held. At shareholders meetings each ordinary share is entitled to one vote when a poll is called, otherwise each 

shareholder has one vote on a show of hands.

During the financial year ended 30 June 2018, the Company did not pay a dividend (30 June 2017: $Nil).

5.6.

Share-Based Payment Arrangements 

5.6.1. Accounting Policies

of the equity instruments at the grant date.

Equity-settled share-based payments to employees and others providing similar services are measured at the fair value 

The consolidated entity operates share-based payment employee share and option schemes. The fair value of the equity 

to which employees become entitled is measured at grant date and recognised as an expense over the vesting period, 

with  a  corresponding  increase  to  an  equity  account.  In  respect  of  share-based  payments  that  are  dependent  on  the 

satisfaction of performance conditions, the number of shares and options expected to vest is reviewed and adjusted at 

each reporting date. The amount recognised for services received as consideration for these equity instruments granted 

is adjusted to reflect the best estimate of the number of equity instruments that eventually vest.

Equity-settled share-based payment transactions with parties other than employees are measured at the fair value of the 

goods or services received, except where that fair value cannot be estimated reliably, in which case they are measured 

at the fair value of the equity instruments granted, measured at the date the entity obtains the goods or the counterparty

renders the service.

Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

5.5.

Contributed Equity

5.6.2. Employee Equity Incentive Plan (“EIP”) 

For  cash-settled  share-based  payment  transactions,  the  liability  needs  to  be  remeasured  at  the  end  of  each  reporting 
period  up  to  the  date  of  settlement,  with  any  changes  in  fair  value  recognised  in  the  profit  or  loss.  This  requires  a 
reassessment of the estimates used at the end of each reporting period.

The  Company  introduced  a  broad  based  equity  incentive  plan  which  was  approved  by  the  Shareholders  at  the  2014 
Annual General Meeting.

(i).

Exempt Share Save Scheme (“SSS”)

In  2015  the  Group  introduced  an  offer  for  Exempt  Shares  in  the  Equity  Incentive  Plan.  The  Plan  gave the  Company’s 
employees  the  opportunity  to  acquire  shares  in  the  Company.  Each  year,  participating  employees  could  make 
contributions from their pre-tax salary to acquire $500 worth of shares. Such employee contributions were matched by 
the Company with an additional $500 worth of shares being acquired for each participating employee. All employees who 
are Australian tax residents with at least 6 months service were entitled to participate in this Plan. Shares acquired under 
this Plan are subject to a holding period of 3 years. The Plan is in runoff and no further shares will be issued. There was 
no issue of shares under this scheme in the current year ended 30 June 2018 (30 June 2017: Nil shares).

(ii).

Share Incentive Plan (“SIP”)

The plan also incorporates a tax-approved scheme to employees in the UK. The Plan gave the Company’s employees 
the  opportunity  to  acquire  shares  in  the  Company.  Employees  could  make  contributions  from  their  pre-tax  salary  to 
acquire £375 (max) worth of shares. Such employee contributions were matched by the Company with a free share for 
every  share  purchased  by  the  employee.  All  employees  of  the  Group  in  the  UK  with  at  least  6  months  service  were 
entitled to participate in this Plan. Shares acquired under this plan are held in trust by MM&K Share Plan Trustee Ltd for 
a period of 5 years from the date of acquisition. The Plan is in runoff and no further shares will be issued. There was no 
issue of shares under this plan during the year ended 30 June 2018 (30 June 2017: Nil shares).

Total Share Capital balance at the end of the 

year

69,527,235

1,348,581

347,245,601

1,119,235

5.6.3. Share Based Payment Arrangements to Former Owners

Included  in  the  terms  of  a  number  of  purchase  agreements  entered  into  by  the  Group is an  arrangement  whereby  the 
payment of cash consideration to and/or the retention of share-based consideration by the vendors of acquired entities is 
contingent upon the relevant vendors remaining with the Group for a defined period.  If a vendor ceases to remain with 
the Group for the prescribed period, the vendor may forfeit its entitlement to payment of the cash consideration and/or its 
ability to retain its share-based consideration, at the discretion of the Group.

These  arrangements  are  treated as  a  share-based  payment  transaction  with  the  former  owners.  The  transaction  is 
measured at the fair value of the equity instruments granted and then recognised as an expense over the vesting period 
as  agreed  per  each  contract.  The  relevant  expense  is  disclosed  in  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss  and  other 
comprehensive income.

5.6.4. Share Based Payment Arrangements under the Syndicated Facility Agreement (“SFA”)

As referred to in Note 5.2.2, in May 2016, the terms of the multicurrency SFA were revised.  Under the revised terms, the 
Group is required to pay a deferred restructure fee to its lenders on refinancing or maturity of the debt in the form of cash 
or warrants, at the irrevocable option of the lender.  As reported to the market on 6 June 2016, 58.4% of lenders elected 
to be paid in cash whilst 41.6% have elected to be paid in warrants.

The  deferred  restructure  fee  was  accounted  for  as  a  compound  share-based  payment  within  the  scope  of  AASB  2, 
including a debt and equity component. The total value of the restructure fee was measured directly, with reference to 
the fair value of the debt establishment services, being $17,821,000. This was determined by proxy as the present value 
of the cash settlement option which amounted to $20,175,000, therefore the initial liability was recognised at $17,821,000
and the residual equity component was initially measured at nil. 

Partial  settlement  of  the  deferred  restructure  fee  liability  occurred  in  June  2016  when  41.6%  of  the  lenders  elected  to 
take  the  warrant  payment  option.    This  resulted  in  a  reclassification  from  liability  to  share  based  payment  reserve  in 
equity  of  $7,413,000 with  no  gain  or  loss  recognised  on  reclassification.    Despite  not  being  due  until  at  least  29  May 
2018, the warrants vested immediately, as there are no conditions attached to the exercise of the warrants.  This equity 
component is not remeasured after vesting and no gain or loss will be recognised when the share capital is issued on 
settlement. The remaining cash payment was treated as a cash-settled share-based payment, and was also not due until 
29 May 2018.

As a result of the revision of the SFA under the Senior Lender Scheme on 22 December 2017, the deferred restructure 
fee  was  further  deferred,  and  is  now  due  at  the  end  of  the  new  5  year  term,  and  the  cash  portion  of  the  deferred 
restructure fee was remeasured to fair value at that date. The liability recognised for the remaining cash component as at 
30 June 2018 is $9,817,000 (30 June 2017: $11,783,000) and is included in the net long term borrowings amounts as 
detailed in Note 5.2.3.

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 56 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 57 

65

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Note 6: Other Notes

6.1. Related Party Disclosures

6.1.1. Equity Interests in Related Parties

The table below lists the primary operating controlled entities of the Group. Individual controlled entities that are dormant
have not been listed. All are owned 100% unless noted.

Country of Incorporation

2018

2017

% Equity Interest

% Equity Interest

2018

2017

Australia

Trilby Misso Lawyers Limited

Slater & Gordon Lawyers NSW 
Pty Limited
Conveyancing Works (Qld) Pty 
Limited

United Kingdom

SGL UK

Walker Smith Way Limited

WSW Limited

Slater & Gordon (UK) 1 Limited

4 Legal Limited 

SGS

iSaaS Technology Limited

Compass Costs Consultants Ltd
Intelligent Claims Management 
Limited

Mobile Doctors Group Limited

Medici Legal Limited

Mobile Doctors Solutions Limited

Mobile Doctors Limited
React & Recover Medical Group 
Limited

Recover Healthcare Limited

React Medical Reporting Limited

Malta

Overland Limited

Overland Health Limited

100%

100%

100%

100%

Schultz Toomey O’Brien Pty 
Ltd

100%

100%

100%

All States Legal Co Pty Ltd

100%

100%

100%

SG NSW Pty Ltd

100%

100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

4 Legal Solutions Limited 

Slater & Gordon (UK) LLP 
Adroit Financial Planning 
Limited

React Medical Management 
Limited
Medicalaw Limited
Abstract Legal Holdings 
Limited
Accident Advice Helpline Direct 
Limited 
Legal Facilities & Management 
Services Limited
Access to Compensation 
Limited
Liberty Protect Limited
Slater Gordon Solutions Legal 
Services Limited
SGS Business Process 
Services (UK) Limited

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Overland Malta (Trading) 
Limited

0%

100%

The Immediate Parent Entity of the Group is AIO V Finance (Ireland) DAC, incorporated in Ireland. The Ultimate Parent 
Entity is Anchorage Capital Group LLC incorporated in the United States of America.

6.1.2. Guarantees for UK lease obligation

To effect the separation of the Group’s UK operations and subsidiaries from its Australian operations under the Senior 
Lender Scheme (as detailed in Note 5 and Note 10), the Company and Slater & Gordon (UK) 1 Limited (“S&G UK”) 
entered into certain transitional arrangements that are governed by a business separation agreement (“Business 
Separation Agreement”).

Slater and Gordon Limited

66

Page 58 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Note 6: Other Notes

6.1. Related Party Disclosures

6.1.1. Equity Interests in Related Parties

The table below lists the primary operating controlled entities of the Group. Individual controlled entities that are dormant

have not been listed. All are owned 100% unless noted.

Country of Incorporation

2018

2017

% Equity Interest

% Equity Interest

2018

2017

100%

100%

100%

100%

Ltd

Schultz Toomey O’Brien Pty 

100%

100%

100%

All States Legal Co Pty Ltd

100%

100%

100%

SG NSW Pty Ltd

100%

100%

Australia

Trilby Misso Lawyers Limited

Slater & Gordon Lawyers NSW 

Conveyancing Works (Qld) Pty 

Pty Limited

Limited

United Kingdom

SGL UK

Walker Smith Way Limited

WSW Limited

Slater & Gordon (UK) 1 Limited

4 Legal Limited 

SGS

iSaaS Technology Limited

Compass Costs Consultants Ltd

Intelligent Claims Management 

Limited

Mobile Doctors Group Limited

Medici Legal Limited

Mobile Doctors Solutions Limited

Mobile Doctors Limited

React & Recover Medical Group 

Limited

Recover Healthcare Limited

React Medical Reporting Limited

Malta

Overland Limited

Overland Health Limited

Separation Agreement”).

Slater and Gordon Limited

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

4 Legal Solutions Limited 

Slater & Gordon (UK) LLP 

Adroit Financial Planning 

Limited

React Medical Management 

Medicalaw Limited

Abstract Legal Holdings 

Limited

Limited

Limited 

Accident Advice Helpline Direct 

Legal Facilities & Management 

Services Limited

Access to Compensation 

Limited

Liberty Protect Limited

Slater Gordon Solutions Legal 

Services Limited

SGS Business Process 

Services (UK) Limited

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Overland Malta (Trading) 

Limited

0%

100%

The Immediate Parent Entity of the Group is AIO V Finance (Ireland) DAC, incorporated in Ireland. The Ultimate Parent 

Entity is Anchorage Capital Group LLC incorporated in the United States of America.

6.1.2. Guarantees for UK lease obligation

To effect the separation of the Group’s UK operations and subsidiaries from its Australian operations under the Senior 

Lender Scheme (as detailed in Note 5 and Note 10), the Company and Slater & Gordon (UK) 1 Limited (“S&G UK”) 

entered into certain transitional arrangements that are governed by a business separation agreement (“Business 

6.1.2. Guarantees for UK lease obligation (continued)

The transitional arrangements involve the parties to the Business Separation Agreement seeking to procure that the 
Company is released from parent guarantees and other forms of security and financial support that it has provided to the 
UK operations. Any potential material contingent liability relates to parent guarantees for UK leases for the major office 
premises used by the UK operations.

The Company has agreed that the timeframe which is reasonably practical for the UK operations to procure the release 
of the parent guarantees will be a period of up to 18 months following the date of implementation of the Recapitalisation,
being 15 December 2017 (or such longer period as agreed between the Company and S&G UK).

If, during the transition period, the UK operations default on the UK leases subject to the parent guarantees, and those 
parent guarantees have not yet been released, the Company may be liable for any unpaid amounts under those leases 
at the time of default. Any contingent liability has the potential to be material in the event that the UK operations were in 
default and the parent guarantees were called upon and the Company was unable to take steps that are typically 
commercially available to mitigate its loss, such as sub-leasing. At 30 June 2018, the aggregate unpaid amounts under 
these lease agreements for the remainder of the lease terms are $87,762,000.

It is not currently possible for the Company to estimate any liability or contingent liability under these guarantees as there
would need to be an event of default by the UK operations to cause any liability. In addition, numerous factors would 
impact on the extent of any potential liability in that event, such as when the guarantee would be called and the amounts 
outstanding at that time, the Company’s ability to take steps to mitigate loss, including subleasing the premises, and its 
capacity to negotiate with the third parties who have the right to call on those guarantees. The UK operations also have a 
number of operational and financial mechanisms in place which seek to prevent an event of default occurring. Liability in 
respect of these guarantees will only arise if the UK operations default on their obligations under the leases and other 
material contracts subject to a parent guarantee, prior to an agreement being made to release that guarantee. 

6.1.3.

Deed of Cross Guarantee

All Australian entities are parties to a deed of cross guarantee under which each company guarantees the debts of the 
others.  By  entering  into  the  deed,  the  wholly-owned  entities  have  been  relieved  from  the  requirement  to  prepare  a 
financial  report  and  directors’  report  under Corporations  Instrument  2016/785  dated  17  December  2016 issued  by  the 
Australian Securities and Investments Commission. 

6.1.4. Key Management Personnel Compensation 

Compensation by category
Short-term employment benefits(1)
Post-employment benefits
Other long term employment benefits
Share based payments
Other benefits

2018
$

2017
$

2,325,760
108,655
67,887
-
419,954

2,924,235
177,750
43,502
879,381
949,550

2,922,256

4,974,418

(1) The amounts do not include fees attributable to Merrick Howes and Nil Stoesser as the Company does not pay them any fees or remuneration. 

6.1.5. Transactions with AIO V Finance (Ireland) DAC (Immediate Parent Entity)

AIO V Finance (Ireland) DAC became the Immediate Parent Entity of the Group on implementation of the Senior Lender 
Scheme,  obtaining  53.36%  of  the  Group’s  ordinary  shares.  The  following  transactions  are  shown  from  22  December 
2017, the date from which AIO V Finance (Ireland) DAC was a related party.

Loans from Immediate Parent Entity

Debt balance on becoming related party

Additional drawdowns

Interest charged 

Foreign exchange movement

Closing balance outstanding

2018

$

59,148,604

14,041,856

3,274,566

57,928

76,522,954

Page 58 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 59 

67

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

6.1.5. Transactions with AIO V Finance (Ireland) DAC (Immediate Parent Entity) (continued)

2018

$

Transactions with Immediate Parent Entity

Issue of new ordinary shares by SGL under the Senior Lender Scheme

118,071,528

In  addition  to  the  above,  AIO  V  Finance  (Ireland)  DAC  has  holds  $7,767,686  of  warrants  issued  under  the  equity 
component of the deferred restructure fee (see Note 5.6.4). This was recognised as a share based payment expense in 
the period ended 30 June 2016.

The loan facilities are advanced by the Immediate Parent Entity as one of the members of the Senior Lender Scheme, on 
the same terms as those agreed with the other lenders. The facilities are unsecured, and repayable in cash on maturity. 
Further details of the terms of the facilities are provided in Note 5.2.2. 

6.1.6. Transactions with Other Related Parties 

The shareholdings of related parties and remuneration of KMP are disclosed in the Directors’ Report.

During the year, the Group has paid consulting fees to JACM Pty Ltd, of which James MacKenzie (Chair) is a Principal. 
The  consulting  fees  of  $62,500  were paid  to  JACM  Pty  Ltd  for  consulting  services  prior  to  December  2017  and was 
approved by the Board.

Outstanding  receivables,  if  any,  between  related  parties  are  included in  Note  4.2.  Outstanding  payables,  if  any,  are 
included in Note 4.6. 

6.2.

Parent Entity Disclosures

As  at,  and  throughout,  the  financial  year  ended  30  June  2018 the  parent  entity  of  the  Group  was  Slater  and  Gordon 
Limited. Investments in subsidiary are accounted for at cost, less any impairment recognised since acquisition.

Results of parent entity
Loss for the year
Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive loss for the year

Financial position for the parent entity at year end
Current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Total liabilities

Total equity of the Parent Company comprising of
Contributed equity
Reserves
Accumulated losses

Total Equity

2018
$’000

2017
$’000

(173,682)
597

(173,085)

(174,247)
619

(173,628)

130,526

256,349

80,116

271,577

127,393

283,756

197,382

335,789

1,348,528
12,885
(1,376,641)

1,119,180
31,745
(1,202,958)

(15,228)

(52,033)

Slater and Gordon Limited

68

Page 60 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

6.1.5. Transactions with AIO V Finance (Ireland) DAC (Immediate Parent Entity) (continued)

6.3.

Auditor’s Remuneration 

The auditor of the Group for the year ended 30 June 2018 is Ernst & Young (30 June 2017: Ernst & Young).

Audit Services
Ernst & Young

Audit and review of financial reports
Other assurance services
Other regulatory services
Overseas Ernst & Young firms

Audit and review of financial reports
Other regulatory audit services

Other Services
Ernst & Young

Other – consulting services

2018
$

2017
$

710,000
90,000
59,500

767,000
-
100,450

947,019
-

1,689,076
42,017

1,806,519

2,598,543

-

19,923

1,806,519

2,618,466

Outstanding  receivables,  if  any,  between  related  parties  are  included in  Note  4.2.  Outstanding  payables,  if  any,  are 

6.4.

Accounting Standards issued but not yet effective at 30 June 2018

2018

$’000

2017

$’000

(173,682)

(174,247)

597

619

(173,085)

(173,628)

130,526

256,349

80,116

271,577

127,393

283,756

197,382

335,789

1,348,528

1,119,180

12,885

31,745

(1,376,641)

(1,202,958)

(15,228)

(52,033)

At the date of authorisation of the financial statements, the Standards and Interpretations that were issued but not yet 
effective, which have not been early adopted are listed below. A formal and detailed assessment of the expected impacts 
of  these  standards  and interpretations is currently  underway  with  the  initial  findings for  each  new  accounting  standard 
noted in the relevant sections below. The Group early adopted AASB 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers during 
year ended 30 June 2016.

Reference
AASB 9 

Title
Financial Instruments

Standard Application date for Group
1 July 2018

1 January 2018

Application date of 

AASB  9  as  issued  replaces most  of  AASB 139 Financial  Instruments:  Recognition  and  Measurement and includes  a 
logical  model  for  classification,  measurement  and  derecognition  of  financial  assets and  liabilities,  a  forward-looking 
“expected loss” impairment model and a substantially reformed approach to hedge accounting. The main changes to the 
classification and measurement of financial assets and liabilities are:

• Financial assets that are debt instruments will be classified based on (i) the objective of the entity's business model 

for managing the financial assets, and (ii) the characteristics of the contractual cash flows.

• Allows an irrevocable election on initial recognition to present gains and losses on investments in equity instruments 
that  are  not  held  for  trading  in  other  comprehensive  income.  Dividends  in  respect  of  these  investments  that  are  a 
return  on  investment  can  be  recognised  in  profit  or  loss  and  there  is  no impairment  or  recycling  on  disposal of the 
instrument.

• Financial assets can be designated and measured at fair value through profit or loss at initial recognition if doing so 
eliminates  or  significantly  reduces  a  measurement  or  recognition  inconsistency  that  would  arise  from  measuring 
assets or liabilities, or recognising the gains and losses on them, on different bases.

• Where  the  fair  value  option  is  used  for  financial  liabilities,  the  change  attributable  to  changes  in  credit  risk  is 

presented in other comprehensive income, and the remaining change is presented in profit or loss.

An assessment of the impact of AASB 9 on the position of the Group is ongoing, however no expected material changes 
in the classification of financial assets and liabilities have been identified to date. The impact of the introduction of the 
expected  loss  impairment  model  for  determining  credit  provisions  has  not  yet  been  determined.  There  is  no  change 
anticipated in relation to hedge accounting.

2018

$

Transactions with Immediate Parent Entity

Issue of new ordinary shares by SGL under the Senior Lender Scheme

118,071,528

In  addition  to  the  above,  AIO  V  Finance  (Ireland)  DAC  has  holds  $7,767,686  of  warrants  issued  under  the  equity 

component of the deferred restructure fee (see Note 5.6.4). This was recognised as a share based payment expense in 

the period ended 30 June 2016.

The loan facilities are advanced by the Immediate Parent Entity as one of the members of the Senior Lender Scheme, on 

the same terms as those agreed with the other lenders. The facilities are unsecured, and repayable in cash on maturity. 

Further details of the terms of the facilities are provided in Note 5.2.2. 

6.1.6. Transactions with Other Related Parties 

The shareholdings of related parties and remuneration of KMP are disclosed in the Directors’ Report.

During the year, the Group has paid consulting fees to JACM Pty Ltd, of which James MacKenzie (Chair) is a Principal. 

The  consulting  fees  of  $62,500  were paid  to  JACM  Pty  Ltd  for  consulting  services  prior  to  December  2017  and was 

As  at,  and  throughout,  the  financial  year  ended  30  June  2018 the  parent  entity  of  the  Group  was  Slater  and  Gordon 

Limited. Investments in subsidiary are accounted for at cost, less any impairment recognised since acquisition.

approved by the Board.

included in Note 4.6. 

6.2.

Parent Entity Disclosures

Results of parent entity

Loss for the year

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive loss for the year

Financial position for the parent entity at year end

Current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Total liabilities

Contributed equity

Reserves

Accumulated losses

Total Equity

Total equity of the Parent Company comprising of

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 60 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 61 

69

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

6.4

Accounting Standards issued but not yet effective at 30 June 2018 (continued)

Reference

AASB Interpretation 23

Title
Uncertainty over Income Tax 
Treatments

Application date of 

Standard Application date for Group

1 January 2019

1 July 2019

The interpretation clarifies the application of the recognition and measurement criteria in AASB 12 Income Taxes when 
there is uncertainty over income tax treatments. The interpretation specifically addresses the following:

• Whether an entity considers uncertain tax treatments separately 

• The assumptions an entity makes about the examination of tax treatment by taxation authorities

• How an entity determines taxable profit (tax loss), tax bases, unused tax losses, unused tax credits and tax rates

• How an entity considers changes in facts and circumstances

The Group has not yet assessed the impact of AASB Interpretation 23.

Reference
AASB 16 

The key features of AASB 16 are as follows:

Lessee Accounting

Application date of 

Title
Leases

Standard Application date for Group
1 July 2019

1 January 2019

•

Lessees are required to recognise assets and liabilities for all leases on balance sheet with a term of more than 12 
months, unless the underlying asset is of low value.

• Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. The measurement includes 
non-cancellable  lease  payments  (including  inflation-linked  payments),  and  also  includes  payments  to  be  made  in 
optional periods if the lessee is reasonably certain to exercise an option to extend the lease, or not to exercise an 
option to terminate the lease.

•

Lessees  will  be  required  to separately  recognise  the  interest  expense  on  the  lease  liability  and  the  depreciation 
expense on the right-of-use asset in profit or loss. This will replace operating lease expense under the current lease 
standard AASB 117 Leases.

• AASB 16 contains disclosure requirements for lessees. 

Lessor Accounting

• AASB  16 substantially  carries  forward  the  lessor  accounting  requirements in the current lease standard AASB  117
Leases. Accordingly, a lessor continues to classify its leases as operating leases or finance leases, and to account 
for those two types of leases differently.

• AASB 16 also requires enhanced disclosures to be provided by lessors that will improve information disclosed about 

a lessor’s risk exposure, particularly to residual value risk.

As at the reporting date, the group has non-cancellable operating lease commitments of $42,267,000, see note 5.3.1. An 
assessment of the impact of AASB 16 on the financial performance and position of the Group is ongoing with a view to 
informing  the  transition  decisions  to  be  made  before  adoption  of  the  new  standard.  It  is  not  yet  possible  to  make  a 
reliable estimate of the impact of the standard on the Consolidated Financial Statements. Although the impact is yet to be 
quantified, given  that  at 30 June  2018 the  Group is  lessee to  a number of operating  leases, in particular  in  relation to 
properties, it is expected that the adoption of the standard will result in a material impact to the assets and liabilities, but 
the change to net assets in the statement of financial position is unlikely to be material. In addition, it is expected that the 
adoption of the standard will change the recognition and measurement of lease expense in the statement of profit or loss.

Currently, the Group does not expect to early adopt AASB 16. 

Slater and Gordon Limited

70

Page 62 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Note 7: Unrecognised Items

7.1. Guarantees

The Group has entered into lease rental guarantees and performance guarantees with a face value of $3,933,000 (30 
June 2017: $12,134,000). Refer to Note 6 for details of the guarantees the Company has provided for the UK leases.

7.2. Other Commitments and Contingencies

The  Group  has  an  agreement  with  third  party  disbursement  funder,  Equal  Access  Funding  Proprietary  Limited  (‘the 
funder”), who funds disbursements in respect of individual matters and is reimbursed out of any settlement proceeds on 
the matter. The Group has provided a financial guarantee to the funder for the repayment of clients’ obligations.

The  total  amount  funded  by  the  funder  to  the  Group’s  clients  at  30  June  2018 is  $6,587,000 (30  June  2017: 
$16,027,000). The maximum exposure of the Group at 30 June 2018 is $6,587,000 (30 June 2017: $16,027,000) if the 
disbursements on client matters are not recovered from any other party. 

7.3.

Contingent Asset – Claims against Watchstone plc (Watchstone – formerly Quindell plc)

Watchstone Receivable

As part of the consideration provided for the implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme, the Company was provided 
with a $40.0m receivable giving it recourse to the first $40m of the net proceeds that S&G UK receives from successful 
settlement  of  the  claims  against  Watchstone  (formerly  Quindell  plc).  Such  claims  were  brought  by  S&G  UK  against 
Watchstone arising  from  its  acquisition  of Watchstone’s  Professional  Services  Division  in  May  2015.  On  29  November 
2016, the Group obtained a positive merits based opinion of its claims from an independent barrister, in accordance with 
the provisions of the Share Purchase Agreement (“SPA”) between the Group and Watchstone. Having met this threshold 
requirement, under the SPA provisions, the escrow amount of £50.0m will not be released until such time as the claim 
made  against  Watchstone  is  resolved  (through  proceedings  or  settlement).  The  Group  notified  Watchstone  of  these 
claims on 19 September 2016, and on 13 June 2017, S&G UK filed and served a claim in the English High Court against 
Watchstone  Group  Plc  for  approximately  £600.0m.  Subsequent  to  this  there  have  been  no  further  significant 
developments  in  the  claim  proceedings  other  than  the  exchange  of  further  pleadings  under  the  Court’s  rules and  the 
commencement of the discovery process. The claim is based upon serious allegations against Watchstone and its then 
senior  management,  including  fraudulent  misrepresentation,  concerning  the  purchase  by  Slater  and  Gordon  of 
Watchstone’s Professional Services Division in 2015. Watchstone filed its defence on 12 October 2017. A trial date has 
been set for October 2019.

6.4

Accounting Standards issued but not yet effective at 30 June 2018 (continued)

Reference

Title

Standard Application date for Group

AASB Interpretation 23

Treatments

1 January 2019

1 July 2019

Uncertainty over Income Tax 

Application date of 

The interpretation clarifies the application of the recognition and measurement criteria in AASB 12 Income Taxes when 

there is uncertainty over income tax treatments. The interpretation specifically addresses the following:

• Whether an entity considers uncertain tax treatments separately 

• The assumptions an entity makes about the examination of tax treatment by taxation authorities

• How an entity determines taxable profit (tax loss), tax bases, unused tax losses, unused tax credits and tax rates

• How an entity considers changes in facts and circumstances

The Group has not yet assessed the impact of AASB Interpretation 23.

Application date of 

Title

Leases

Standard Application date for Group

1 January 2019

1 July 2019

Reference

AASB 16 

The key features of AASB 16 are as follows:

Lessee Accounting

•

•

Lessees are required to recognise assets and liabilities for all leases on balance sheet with a term of more than 12 

months, unless the underlying asset is of low value.

• Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. The measurement includes 

non-cancellable  lease  payments  (including  inflation-linked  payments),  and  also  includes  payments  to  be  made  in 

optional periods if the lessee is reasonably certain to exercise an option to extend the lease, or not to exercise an 

option to terminate the lease.

Lessees  will  be  required  to separately  recognise  the  interest  expense  on  the  lease  liability  and  the  depreciation 

expense on the right-of-use asset in profit or loss. This will replace operating lease expense under the current lease 

standard AASB 117 Leases.

• AASB 16 contains disclosure requirements for lessees. 

Lessor Accounting

• AASB  16 substantially  carries  forward  the  lessor  accounting  requirements in the current lease standard AASB  117

Leases. Accordingly, a lessor continues to classify its leases as operating leases or finance leases, and to account 

for those two types of leases differently.

• AASB 16 also requires enhanced disclosures to be provided by lessors that will improve information disclosed about 

a lessor’s risk exposure, particularly to residual value risk.

As at the reporting date, the group has non-cancellable operating lease commitments of $42,267,000, see note 5.3.1. An 

assessment of the impact of AASB 16 on the financial performance and position of the Group is ongoing with a view to 

informing  the  transition  decisions  to  be  made  before  adoption  of  the  new  standard.  It  is  not  yet  possible  to  make  a 

reliable estimate of the impact of the standard on the Consolidated Financial Statements. Although the impact is yet to be 

quantified, given  that  at 30 June  2018 the  Group is  lessee to  a number of operating  leases, in particular  in  relation to 

properties, it is expected that the adoption of the standard will result in a material impact to the assets and liabilities, but 

the change to net assets in the statement of financial position is unlikely to be material. In addition, it is expected that the 

adoption of the standard will change the recognition and measurement of lease expense in the statement of profit or loss.

Currently, the Group does not expect to early adopt AASB 16. 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 62 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 63 

71

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

7.4.

Contingent Liabilities – Class Action Proceedings

On  12  October  2016  legal  proceedings  were  filed  against  the  Company  in  the  Federal  Court  of  Australia  (“Federal 
Court”) by Mr Matthew Hall on behalf of an open class of Slater and Gordon shareholders (the “Hall proceeding”). The 
class  action  proceeding  asserted  that  the  Company  engaged  in  misleading  or  deceptive  conduct  and  breached  its 
continuous disclosure obligations during the period from 30 March 2015 to 24 February 2016 and sought compensation 
or  refund of investments,  plus  interest  and costs.  This class  action  proceeding  was settled  by  agreement  in  July  2017 
through  a  Federal  Court mediation,  subject  to  creditor,  shareholder  and  Court  approval  of  a  shareholder  claimant  and 
senior lender scheme of arrangement. 

On  20  June  2017,  the  Company  announced  that  legal  proceedings  were  filed  against  it  by  Babscay  Pty  Ltd  (the 
“Babscay  proceeding”)  on  behalf  of  persons  who  acquired  an  interest  in  shares  of  the  Company  between  24  August 
2012 and 19 November 2015. The statement of claim asserted that the Company’s financial statements for the financial 
years ended 30 June 2013, 2014 and 2015 contained false or misleading statements. This claim was later amended to 
also include the Company’s financial statements for the financial year ended 30 June 2012.  The allegations focus on the 
way  in  which  the  Company  recognised  revenue  and,  in  financial  year  2015,  accounted  for  acquisitions  in  accordance 
with Australian Accounting Standards.  

On 14 December 2017 the Federal Court approved a scheme of arrangement between the Company and all shareholder 
claimants (“Shareholder Claimant Scheme”), including claimants in the Hall and Babscay proceedings. The Shareholder 
Claimant Scheme resolves and compromises all potential shareholder claims against the Company and its officers. The 
Shareholder  Claimant  Scheme  became  legally  effective  on  15  December  2017. Under  the  Scheme,  shareholder 
claimants have released the Company and officers from any shareholder claims and the Scheme can be pleaded as a 
bar to any shareholder claim.

On 14 December 2017 the Federal Court also approved the settlement of the Hall proceeding and dismissed that
proceeding. The Company’s contribution to this settlement of $5.0m was recognised as a provision at 30 June 2017. The
Hall proceeding settlement is implemented by the Shareholder Claimant Scheme. The Babscay proceeding has not yet
been formally dismissed or discontinued, however the Shareholder Claimant Scheme releases the Company and officers
and bars the prosecution of that claim.

On 1 November 2017, class action legal proceedings were filed against the Company’s former auditors, Pitcher Partners,
by Babscay Pty Ltd (the “Babscay Pitcher proceeding”). On 16 November 2017, the Federal Court made orders allowing
Pitcher Partners to seek leave of the Court to make a third party claim against the Company and/or its directors, seeking
contribution or indemnity from those parties in relation to the Babscay Pitchers proceeding. On 15 December 2017, the
Federal Court granted leave to Pitcher Partners to file such a cross claim and on 23 February 2018, Pitcher Partners
served a cross claim on the Company and its former directors. Since being served with third party claim, the Company
has been in discussions with Pitcher Partners around the ongoing conduct of the claim. Under the Shareholder Claimant
Scheme, the Company and its former directors are indemnified by shareholder claimants from any claim made against
them by a third party which arises as a result of a claim made by a shareholder claimant against that third party.

Slater and Gordon Limited

72

Page 64 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

7.4.

Contingent Liabilities – Class Action Proceedings

On  12  October  2016  legal  proceedings  were  filed  against  the  Company  in  the  Federal  Court  of  Australia  (“Federal 

Court”) by Mr Matthew Hall on behalf of an open class of Slater and Gordon shareholders (the “Hall proceeding”). The 

class  action  proceeding  asserted  that  the  Company  engaged  in  misleading  or  deceptive  conduct  and  breached  its 

continuous disclosure obligations during the period from 30 March 2015 to 24 February 2016 and sought compensation 

or  refund of investments,  plus  interest  and costs.  This class  action  proceeding  was settled  by  agreement  in  July  2017 

through  a  Federal  Court mediation,  subject  to  creditor,  shareholder  and  Court  approval  of  a  shareholder  claimant  and 

senior lender scheme of arrangement. 

On  20  June  2017,  the  Company  announced  that  legal  proceedings  were  filed  against  it  by  Babscay  Pty  Ltd  (the 

“Babscay  proceeding”)  on  behalf  of  persons  who  acquired  an  interest  in  shares  of  the  Company  between  24  August 

2012 and 19 November 2015. The statement of claim asserted that the Company’s financial statements for the financial 

years ended 30 June 2013, 2014 and 2015 contained false or misleading statements. This claim was later amended to 

also include the Company’s financial statements for the financial year ended 30 June 2012.  The allegations focus on the 

way  in  which  the  Company  recognised  revenue  and,  in  financial  year  2015,  accounted  for  acquisitions  in  accordance 

with Australian Accounting Standards.  

On 14 December 2017 the Federal Court approved a scheme of arrangement between the Company and all shareholder 

claimants (“Shareholder Claimant Scheme”), including claimants in the Hall and Babscay proceedings. The Shareholder 

Claimant Scheme resolves and compromises all potential shareholder claims against the Company and its officers. The 

Shareholder  Claimant  Scheme  became  legally  effective  on  15  December  2017. Under  the  Scheme,  shareholder 

claimants have released the Company and officers from any shareholder claims and the Scheme can be pleaded as a 

bar to any shareholder claim.

On 14 December 2017 the Federal Court also approved the settlement of the Hall proceeding and dismissed that

proceeding. The Company’s contribution to this settlement of $5.0m was recognised as a provision at 30 June 2017. The

Hall proceeding settlement is implemented by the Shareholder Claimant Scheme. The Babscay proceeding has not yet

been formally dismissed or discontinued, however the Shareholder Claimant Scheme releases the Company and officers

and bars the prosecution of that claim.

On 1 November 2017, class action legal proceedings were filed against the Company’s former auditors, Pitcher Partners,

by Babscay Pty Ltd (the “Babscay Pitcher proceeding”). On 16 November 2017, the Federal Court made orders allowing

Pitcher Partners to seek leave of the Court to make a third party claim against the Company and/or its directors, seeking

contribution or indemnity from those parties in relation to the Babscay Pitchers proceeding. On 15 December 2017, the

Federal Court granted leave to Pitcher Partners to file such a cross claim and on 23 February 2018, Pitcher Partners

served a cross claim on the Company and its former directors. Since being served with third party claim, the Company

has been in discussions with Pitcher Partners around the ongoing conduct of the claim. Under the Shareholder Claimant

Scheme, the Company and its former directors are indemnified by shareholder claimants from any claim made against

them by a third party which arises as a result of a claim made by a shareholder claimant against that third party.

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Note 8:  Subsequent Events

The Directors are not aware of any significant events since the end of the reporting period.

Note 9:  Business Combinations 

9.1.

Accounting Policies

Business combinations are accounted for by applying the acquisition method. The cost of an acquisition is measured as 
the aggregate of the consideration transferred, which is measured at acquisition-date fair value, and the amount of any 
non-controlling interests in the acquiree. Deferred consideration payable is measured at present value. Any contingent 
consideration to be transferred by the acquirer is recognised at the acquisition-date fair value. Contingent consideration 
classified  as  a  liability  that  is  a  financial  instrument  and  within  the  scope  of  AASB  139  is  measured  at  fair  value  with 
changes in fair value recognised in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. For each business 
combination,  the  Group  elects  whether  to  measure  the  non-controlling  interests  in  the  acquiree  at  fair  value  or  the 
proportionate share of the acquiree identifiable net assets. Acquisition related costs are expensed as incurred.

Goodwill is initially measured at cost (being the excess of the aggregate of the consideration transferred and the amount 
recognised for  non-controlling  interests)  and  any  previous  interest  held  over  the  net  identifiable  assets  acquired  and 
liabilities assumed. If the fair value of the net assets acquired is in excess of the aggregate consideration transferred, the
Group  re-assesses  whether  it  has  correctly  identified  all  of  the  assets  acquired  and  all  of  the  liabilities  assumed  and 
reviews the procedures used to measure the amounts recognised at the acquisition date. If the reassessment still results 
in  an  excess  of  the  fair  value  of  net  assets  acquired  over  the  aggregate  consideration  transferred,  then  the  gain  is 
recognised in profit or loss as a gain from bargain purchase.

In conjunction with the business combination transaction there may be a transfer of assets between controlled entities as 
part of restructuring the acquired business. The parent accounts for such transfers through reallocation of the cost of the 
investments in its statement of financial position. 

9.2.

Current Period Business Combinations

There were no business combinations during the year ended 30 June 2018.

9.3.

Prior Period Business Combinations

There were no business combinations during the year ended 30 June 2017.

Note 10: Discontinued operations

10.1. Summary of financial performance of discontinued operations

The summary of financial performance of the divestment or closure of the UK and Australian businesses are in the below 
table.

Revenue 
Other income
Expenses

(Loss) of discontinued operation before income tax expense 

Net gain / (loss) from disposal before income tax expense
Income tax expense:

Income tax (expense) / benefit from discontinued operations
Income tax benefit on disposal of discontinued operations

Profit / (loss) from discontinued operations net of tax

Revenue 
Other income
Expenses

Profit / (loss) from discontinued operation before income tax 
expense 
Income tax expense

Profit / (loss) from discontinued operations net of tax

UK
30 Jun 2018
$’000
157,691

Aus
30 Jun 2018
$’000
16,308

2,940
(208,369)

(47,738)

195,754

(1,092)
15,993

162,917

UK
30 Jun 2017
$’000
390,186
9,314
(855,925)

(456,425)

(17,028)

(473,453)

3
(29,632)

(13,321)

(8,163)

3,996
217

(17,271)

Aus
30 Jun 2017
$’000
29,800
51
(28,306)

1,545

(464)

1,081

Total
30 Jun 2018
$’000
173,999
2,943
(238,001)

(61,059)

187,591

2,904
16,210

145,646

Total
30 Jun 2017
$’000
419,986
9,365
(884,231)

(454,880)

(17,492)

(472,372)

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 64 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 65 

73

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

10.2. Financial performance from discontinued operation – UK 

Discontinued operations – UK

On 6 December 2017, the Company shareholders approved a Recapitalisation of the Group with the implementation of a 
creditor’s  Scheme  of  Arrangement  (“the  Senior  Lender  Scheme”).  The  Senior  Lender  Scheme  was  effective  from  15 
December 2017 and implemented on 22 December 2017. Consequently, this scheme resulted in:

a) Separation  of  all  UK  operations  and  UK  subsidiaries  from  the  Group  effective  from  15  December  2017 
(including  Slater  and  Gordon  (UK)  1  Ltd),  by  way  of  transfer  of  these  operations  and  entities  to  Slater  and 
Gordon UK Holdings Limited, an entity wholly owned by the Company’s majority Senior Lender.

b)

Issue of 66,050,874 shares in the Australian Parent Company to the Senior Lenders, representing 95% of the 
Company’s total issued capital.

c) Reduction  of  outstanding  secured  debt  facilities  owed  by  the  Group  by  a  combination  of  restating  and 

refinancing the debt. 

The  UK  subsidiaries  and  related  operations  represent  a  separate  major  geographical  area  of  operations,  and  are 
therefore presented as a discontinued operation in the current period. The comparative consolidated statement of profit 
and  loss  and  other  comprehensive  income  has  been  restated  to  show  the  discontinued  operation  separately  from 
continuing operations.

Classification as discontinued operations – Critical accounting judgements

The transfer of the UK subsidiaries and related operations was conditional on the other transactions comprising the 
Senior Lender Scheme, being the issue of equity to the Senior Lenders in the Australian Parent Company and reduction 
of outstanding secured debt facilities. The transactions are economically linked and could not have occurred 
independently as they achieve an overall economic outcome. Consequently, the impact of the transactions comprising 
the Senior Lender Scheme has been presented in aggregate as part of the overall net gain on disposal of discontinued 
operations.

The financial performance and cash flow information presented are for the period ended 15 December 2017 (being the 
effective date from which the UK subsidiaries were deconsolidated) and the year ended 30 June 2017.

Revenue 
Other income
Expenses

(Loss) of discontinued operation before income tax expense 
Income Tax (expense) / benefit

(Loss) from discontinued operations net of tax

to 15 Dec 2017
$’000
157,691

2,940
(208,369)

(47,738)
(1,092)

(48,830)

30 Jun 2017
$’000
390,186
9,314
(855,925)

(456,425)
(17,028)

(473,453)

Slater and Gordon Limited

74

Page 66 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

10.2. Financial performance from discontinued operation – UK 

10.3. Carrying value of net assets divested – UK

Discontinued operations – UK

The carrying amounts of assets and liabilities as at the date of transfer were:

Senior Lender Scheme, being the issue of equity to the Senior Lenders in the Australian Parent Company and reduction 

Total non-current assets

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Receivables

Work in progress

Other current assets

Total current assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Receivables

Work in progress

Intangible assets

Deferred tax assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Payables

Short term borrowings

Current tax liabilities

Other current liabilities

Provisions

Total current liabilities(1)

Non-current liabilities

Long term borrowings

Provisions

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets / (liabilities)

On 6 December 2017, the Company shareholders approved a Recapitalisation of the Group with the implementation of a 

creditor’s  Scheme  of  Arrangement  (“the  Senior  Lender  Scheme”).  The  Senior  Lender  Scheme  was  effective  from  15 

December 2017 and implemented on 22 December 2017. Consequently, this scheme resulted in:

a) Separation  of  all  UK  operations  and  UK  subsidiaries  from  the  Group  effective  from  15  December  2017 

(including  Slater  and  Gordon  (UK)  1  Ltd),  by  way  of  transfer  of  these  operations  and  entities  to  Slater  and 

Gordon UK Holdings Limited, an entity wholly owned by the Company’s majority Senior Lender.

b)

Issue of 66,050,874 shares in the Australian Parent Company to the Senior Lenders, representing 95% of the 

c) Reduction  of  outstanding  secured  debt  facilities  owed  by  the  Group  by  a  combination  of  restating  and 

Company’s total issued capital.

refinancing the debt. 

The  UK  subsidiaries  and  related  operations  represent  a  separate  major  geographical  area  of  operations,  and  are 

therefore presented as a discontinued operation in the current period. The comparative consolidated statement of profit 

and  loss  and  other  comprehensive  income  has  been  restated  to  show  the  discontinued  operation  separately  from 

continuing operations.

Classification as discontinued operations – Critical accounting judgements

The transfer of the UK subsidiaries and related operations was conditional on the other transactions comprising the 

of outstanding secured debt facilities. The transactions are economically linked and could not have occurred 

independently as they achieve an overall economic outcome. Consequently, the impact of the transactions comprising 

the Senior Lender Scheme has been presented in aggregate as part of the overall net gain on disposal of discontinued 

The financial performance and cash flow information presented are for the period ended 15 December 2017 (being the 

effective date from which the UK subsidiaries were deconsolidated) and the year ended 30 June 2017.

operations.

Revenue 

Other income

Expenses

(Loss) of discontinued operation before income tax expense 

Income Tax (expense) / benefit

(Loss) from discontinued operations net of tax

to 15 Dec 2017

30 Jun 2017

$’000

157,691

2,940

(208,369)

(47,738)

(1,092)

(48,830)

$’000

390,186

9,314

(855,925)

(456,425)

(17,028)

(473,453)

15 Dec 2017
$’000

18,439

303,128

183,159

16,152

520,878

15,980

66,531

86,968

12,185

8,443

190,107

710,985

347,253

9,013

6,315

34

11,585

               374,200

-

12,623

12,623

386,823

324,162

(1) The carrying amount of liabilities is shown after the extinguishment of $674,219,000 of debt. This amount is included 
within the gain from discontinued operations shown in Note 10.5.

10.4. Cash flows arising from disposal – UK

Consideration received, satisfied in cash
Cash and cash equivalents disposed of

Net cash outflows

15 Dec 2017
$’000
-

(18,439)

(18,439)

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 66 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 67 

75

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

10.5. Gain from discontinued operations – UK

The gain arising on implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme including disposal of the UK operations is determined 
as follows.

Carrying value of net assets disposed
Derecognition of non-controlling interests
Consideration received
Fair value of equity instruments issued by SGL (i)
Extinguishment of debt (ii)
Recycling of cash flow hedge reserve balance
Acceleration of UK share based payments expense to former owners (iii)
Transaction costs relating to scheme of arrangement(iv)
Reclassification of foreign currency translation reserve upon disposal
Income tax benefit

Net gain on implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme and disposal of 
the UK operations

2018
$’000
(324,162)
(178)
40,000
(221,270)
693,864
(848)
(1,662)
(7,094)
17,104
15,993

211,747

(i)

Fair value of equity instruments issued

66,050,874  shares  in  the  Australian  Parent  Company  were  issued  to  the  Senior  Lenders  as  part  of  the  overall 
consideration for the Senior Lender Scheme, and were therefore part of the consideration given to reduce the Group’s 
outstanding debt in Australia and the UK immediately prior to deconsolidation. 

The transaction is within the scope of the requirements of AASB Interpretation 19 Extinguishing Financial Liabilities with 
Equity Instruments.  Hence,  the  shares  were  recognised  initially  and  measured  at  their  fair  value  as  at  22  December 
2017, being the date the debt is restated. Fair value was determined with reference to the quoted share price of $3.35 
per share on this date. 

(ii)

Extinguishment of debt 

The refinancing of the Super Senior Facility and Restated Syndicated Facility Agreement represents an extinguishment 
of  the  original  facilities.  The  new  facilities  were  recognised  at  their  fair  values  as  at  22  December  2017,  with  the 
difference recorded within profit or loss, and presented as part of the net gain on the implementation of the Senior Lender
Scheme and disposal of the UK operations.

(iii)

Acceleration of share based payments

The  transfer  resulted  in  the  acceleration  of  Share  Based  Payments  to  former  owners  due  to  employees  of  the  UK 
subsidiaries. The associated cost has been recognised in profit or loss, and presented as a component of the net gain on 
the implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme and disposal of the UK operations.

(iv)

Transaction costs relating to scheme of arrangement

Following the deconsolidation of the UK operations on 15 December 2017, additional transaction costs of $389,660 have 
been incurred subsequent to this date for the scheme of arrangement. As a result, the total transaction costs relating to 
scheme of arrangement at 30 June 2018 is $7,094,324. 

Slater and Gordon Limited

76

Page 68 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

10.5. Gain from discontinued operations – UK

10.6. Financial performance from discontinued operation – Australia 

The gain arising on implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme including disposal of the UK operations is determined 

Discontinued operations – Australia 

as follows.

Carrying value of net assets disposed

Derecognition of non-controlling interests

Consideration received

Fair value of equity instruments issued by SGL (i)

Extinguishment of debt (ii)

Recycling of cash flow hedge reserve balance

Acceleration of UK share based payments expense to former owners (iii)

Transaction costs relating to scheme of arrangement(iv)

Reclassification of foreign currency translation reserve upon disposal

Income tax benefit

the UK operations

Net gain on implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme and disposal of 

2018

$’000

(324,162)

(178)

40,000

(221,270)

693,864

(848)

(1,662)

(7,094)

17,104

15,993

211,747

(i)

Fair value of equity instruments issued

66,050,874  shares  in  the  Australian  Parent  Company  were  issued  to  the  Senior  Lenders  as  part  of  the  overall 

consideration for the Senior Lender Scheme, and were therefore part of the consideration given to reduce the Group’s 

outstanding debt in Australia and the UK immediately prior to deconsolidation. 

The transaction is within the scope of the requirements of AASB Interpretation 19 Extinguishing Financial Liabilities with 

Equity Instruments.  Hence,  the  shares  were  recognised  initially  and  measured  at  their  fair  value  as  at  22  December 

2017, being the date the debt is restated. Fair value was determined with reference to the quoted share price of $3.35 

per share on this date. 

(ii)

Extinguishment of debt 

The refinancing of the Super Senior Facility and Restated Syndicated Facility Agreement represents an extinguishment 

of  the  original  facilities.  The  new  facilities  were  recognised  at  their  fair  values  as  at  22  December  2017,  with  the 

difference recorded within profit or loss, and presented as part of the net gain on the implementation of the Senior Lender

Scheme and disposal of the UK operations.

(iii)

Acceleration of share based payments

The  transfer  resulted  in  the  acceleration  of  Share  Based  Payments  to  former  owners  due  to  employees  of  the  UK 

subsidiaries. The associated cost has been recognised in profit or loss, and presented as a component of the net gain on 

the implementation of the Senior Lender Scheme and disposal of the UK operations.

(iv)

Transaction costs relating to scheme of arrangement

Following the deconsolidation of the UK operations on 15 December 2017, additional transaction costs of $389,660 have 

been incurred subsequent to this date for the scheme of arrangement. As a result, the total transaction costs relating to 

scheme of arrangement at 30 June 2018 is $7,094,324. 

On 7 February 2018, the Company announced that it had undertaken an internal review and have broadened the review 
of Personal Injury practices. Following the review, the Company determined it would: 

•

•

•

•

Downsize the General Law business, by winding down or divesting the practice areas of Succession, Criminal, 
and Family Law, to focus on Personal Injury, Class Actions and the Industrial/Union practice; 

Retain a smaller commercial litigation practice;

Expand Union Services to maintain a criminal services offering and free wills to union clients;

Continue to focus on improving the firm’s service delivery.

The businesses that are subject to divestment or closure under this plan represent a separate major line of business, and 
are therefore presented as discontinued operations.

The financial performance and cash flow information presented are for the periods ending on the various disposal dates 
(April – June 2018) and the year ended 30 June 2018.

Revenue 
Other income
Expenses

Profit / (loss) of discontinued operation before income tax expense 
Income tax (expense) / benefit

Profit / (loss) from discontinued operations net of tax

10.7. Carrying value of net assets divested – Australia 

The carrying amounts of assets and liabilities as at the date of transfer were:

30 Jun 2018
$’000
16,308

3
(29,632)

(13,321)

3,996

(9,325)

30 Jun 2017
$’000
29,800
51
(28,306)

1,545

(464)

1,081

Assets

Receivables

Work in progress

Property, plant and equipment

Total assets

Liabilities

Provisions

Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets 

30 Jun 2018
$’000

390

7,818

204

8,412

255

2,269

2,524

5,888

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 68 

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 69 

77

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

10.8. Assets held for sale – Australia 

Two  of  the  businesses  being  sold  remained  on  hand  at  30  June  2018. The  assets  and  liabilities  expected  to  be 
transferred as part of the sales have been classified as held for sale at 30 June 2018. 

The carrying amounts of assets and liabilities as at 30 June 2018 were:

Current assets 

Work in progress
Property, plant and equipment

Total assets

Current liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

30 June 2018
$’000

133
-

133

40

40

93

These assets are measured at the lower of their carrying value and their fair value less costs to sell. An impairment loss 
of  $358,000 was recognised as  a  result  of  writing  down  the  assets  in  the  disposal  group  down  to  their  fair  value  less 
costs to sell.

10.9. Cash flows arising from disposal – Australia 

Consideration paid, satisfied in cash
Cash and cash equivalents disposed of

Net cash outflows

10.10. Loss from discontinued operations – Australia 

The loss arising on disposal of the business is determined as follows.

Carrying value of net assets disposed
Consideration received
Transaction costs 
Income tax (expense) / benefit

Net (loss) on disposal of the Australian businesses

30 Jun 2018
$’000
(228)
-

                      (228)

2018
$’000
(8,157)
1,908
(1,914)
217

(7,946)

78

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 70

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements

For the Year Ended 30 June 2018

Slater and Gordon Limited
Directors’ Declaration

(b).
(c).

The directors declare that the financial statements and notes set out on pages 32 to 78 and the directors’ report are    
in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 and:
(a).

Comply with Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001, and other mandatory professional reporting 
requirements;
As stated in Note 1, the financial statements also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards;
Give a true and fair view of the financial position of the consolidated entity as at 30 June 2018 and of its performance as 
represented by the results of its operations, changes in equity and its cash flows,for the year ended on that date.

10.8. Assets held for sale – Australia 

Two  of  the  businesses  being  sold  remained  on  hand  at  30  June  2018. The  assets  and  liabilities  expected  to  be 

transferred as part of the sales have been classified as held for sale at 30 June 2018. 

The carrying amounts of assets and liabilities as at 30 June 2018 were:

Current assets 

Work in progress

Property, plant and equipment

Total assets

Current liabilities

Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

30 June 2018

$’000

133

-

133

40

40

93

2018

$’000

(8,157)

1,908

(1,914)

217

(7,946)

In the directors’ opinion there are reasonable grounds to believe that:

• Slater and Gordon Limited will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable.

•

the Company and the group entities identified in Note 6.1 will be able to meet any obligations or liabilities to which 
they are or may become subject to by virtue of the Deed of Cross Guarantee between the Company and those group
entities pursuant to ASIC Corporations Instrument 2016/785.

This declaration has been made after receiving the declarations required to be made by the chief executive officer and 
chief financial officer to the directors in accordance with sections 295A of the Corporations Act 2001 for the financial year 
ended 30 June 2018.

This declaration is made in accordance with a resolution of the directors.

These assets are measured at the lower of their carrying value and their fair value less costs to sell. An impairment loss 

of  $358,000 was recognised as  a  result  of  writing  down  the  assets  in  the  disposal  group  down  to  their  fair  value  less 

costs to sell.

10.9. Cash flows arising from disposal – Australia 

30 Jun 2018

$’000

(228)

-

                      (228)

James MacKenzie 

Chair

Melbourne

29 August 2018

Consideration paid, satisfied in cash

Cash and cash equivalents disposed of

Net cash outflows

10.10. Loss from discontinued operations – Australia 

The loss arising on disposal of the business is determined as follows.

Carrying value of net assets disposed

Consideration received

Transaction costs 

Income tax (expense) / benefit

Net (loss) on disposal of the Australian businesses

Slater and Gordon Limited

Page 70

Slater and Gordon Limited

79

Page 71

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018 
 
Ernst & Young 
8 Exhibition Street  
Melbourne  VIC  3000  Australia 
GPO Box 67 Melbourne  VIC  3001 

Tel: +61 3 9288 8000 
Fax: +61 3 8650 7777 
ey.com/au 

Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Slater and Gordon 
Limited 

Report on the Audit of the Financial Report 

Opinion 

We have audited the financial report of Slater and Gordon Limited (the Company) and its subsidiaries 
(collectively the Group), which comprises the consolidated statement of financial position as at  
30 June 2018, the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, 
consolidated statement of changes in equity and consolidated statement of cash flows for the year 
then ended, notes to the financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies, 
and the directors' declaration. 

In our opinion, the accompanying financial report of the Group is in accordance with the Corporations 
Act 2001, including: 

a)

giving a true and fair view of the consolidated financial position of the Group as at 30 June
2018 and of its consolidated financial performance for the year ended on that date; and

b)

complying with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001.

Basis for Opinion 

We conducted our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. Our responsibilities under 
those standards are further described in the Auditor’s Responsibilities for the Audit of the Financial 
Report section of our report. We are independent of the Group in accordance with the auditor 
independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 and the ethical requirements of the 
Accounting Professional and Ethical Standards Board’s APES 110 Code of Ethics for Professional 
Accountants (the Code) that are relevant to our audit of the financial report in Australia. We have also 
fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with the Code.  

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis 
for our opinion. 

Key Audit Matters 

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in 
our audit of the financial report of the current year. These matters were addressed in the context of 
our audit of the financial report as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, but we do not provide 
a separate opinion on these matters. For each matter below, our description of how our audit 
addressed the matter is provided in that context. We have determined the matters described below to 
be the key audit matters to be communicated in our report. 

We have fulfilled the responsibilities described in the Auditor’s Responsibilities for the Audit of the 
Financial Report section of our report, including in relation to these matters. Accordingly, our audit 
included the performance of procedures designed to respond to our assessment of the risks of 
material misstatement of the financial report. The results of our audit procedures, including the 
procedures performed to address the matters below, provide the basis for our audit opinion on the 
accompanying financial report. 

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

80

Page 72 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Senior Lender Scheme Implementation and United Kingdom (UK) Discontinued Operations 

Why significant 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter 

In December 2017, the shareholders of the 
Company approved a recapitalisation of the 
Group with the implementation of a creditors 
Scheme of Arrangement (“the Senior Lender 
Scheme”). 

The disposal of former UK subsidiaries and 
related operations was conditional on a 
number of transactions comprising the Senior 
Lender Scheme, the issue of equity in the 
Australian parent company to the Senior 
Lenders and the reduction of outstanding debt 
facilities.  

The transactions were determined to be 
economically linked and could not have 
occurred independently as they achieve an 
overall economic outcome. 

The Group’s disclosures regarding the Senior 
Lender Scheme Implementation and UK 
Discontinued Operations are included in Note 
5.2.2 and Notes 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 of the 
financial report. 

Given the estimates and judgements involved 
in the timing of separation and the calculation 
of the net gain on disposal, this transaction 
was considered to be a Key Audit Matter. 

Our procedures included the following: 

►

►

►

►

►

►

Assessed the accounting treatment for this
transaction including the timing of recording
the associated net gain on disposal, the
presentation of the net gain on disposal as an
aggregate amount and the loss of control of
the UK subsidiaries.

Considered the requirement to record the
issue of equity to the Senior Lenders in the
Australian parent company at fair value, being
the Company’s share price of $3.35 on the
date of the scheme implementation in
accordance with Australian Accounting
Standards.  An independent expert’s report in
relation to the Senior Lenders Scheme made
an assessment that the implied equity value
of the Group at the time of issuance was in
the range of $0.30 - $1.10 per share.

Assessed the quantitative and qualitative
factors used by management to support the
extinguishment of all existing UK borrowings
and the reduction of Australian debt facilities.

Assessed the determination of those
operations considered discontinued under
Australian Accounting Standards at 30 June
2018.

Assessed the key assumptions used as part of
management’s valuations of the Convertible
and Promissory Notes. We involved our
valuation specialists to assist in the work
where we considered such expertise was
required.

Considered the adequacy of the financial
report disclosures contained in Note 5.2.2
and Notes 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 and the
presentation in aggregate as part of the
overall net gain on disposal of discontinued
operations.

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

Page 73 

81

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Going concern 

Why significant 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter 

As disclosed in Note 1.1 to the financial report 
the Directors concluded that in their opinion, 
despite the Group continuing to generate 
operating losses there are reasonable grounds 
to believe that the Group has the ability to pay 
its debts as and when they fall due. The 
financial report has been prepared on a going 
concern basis.  

The going concern assumption is fundamental 
to the basis of preparation of the financial 
report.  Given the judgment involved in the 
preparation of cash flow forecasts to support 
the going concern conclusion, this was 
considered a Key Audit Matter. 

Our procedures included the following: 

►

►

►

►

►

Evaluated the assumptions made in the
budget and the cash flow forecasts approved
by the Board.

Assessed the consistency of the assumptions
included in the cash flow model with
statements related to future plans and
commitments contained in the directors
report.

Considered the historical accuracy of the
Group’s cash flow forecasting by reference to
actual results in prior periods compared to
Board approved budgets.

Considered the impact of a range of
sensitivities to the cash flow model to assess
the breakeven position, including reference to
financial covenants related to the Group’s
borrowing facilities.

Assessed the adequacy of the going concern
disclosures contained in Note 1.1.

Work in Progress and Associated Revenue Recognition 

Why significant 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter 

Work in progress (WIP) is significant to the 
Group, comprising 64.5% of total assets. 
Movements in WIP are included in revenue 
recognised for the year.  

The Group’s disclosures regarding WIP and the 
associated revenue recognised are included in 
Notes 3.1 and Note 4.3 to the financial report. 

The Directors’ determination of the carrying 
value of WIP and its associated revenue 
streams involves significant judgement, data 
analysis and complexity. 

The Group considers each revenue stream in 
isolation and makes judgements in relation to: 

►

►

The identification of a contract

The identification of the performance
obligations as part or within a contract

Our procedures included the following: 

►

►

►

►

Considered whether the Groups’ accounting
policy for WIP complied with Australian
Accounting Standards, in particular AASB 15
Revenue.

Obtained details of WIP recognised for each
revenue stream at balance date and applied
sampling techniques to select individual legal
matters (“cases”) for testing.

Assessed that cases subject to divestment or
wind down due to the Group’s decision to exit
certain Australian law practices, were
excluded from the data models.

Obtained evidence to support the case status
that had been allocated to each case file by
the responsible professional. Evidence
obtained was assessed against the coding
guidelines of the Group.

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

82

Page 74 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Why significant 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter 

►

►

►

Determination of the transaction price,
particularly for revenue streams
accounted under a “no win no fee” basis

Allocation of the transaction price

Recognition of revenue when a
performance obligation is satisfied

To validate the judgements made in relation to 
WIP, the Group develops a series of data 
models based on historical information over a 
two year period. Data included in these models 
provides a methodological approach to 
determine the valuation status. 

Accordingly, this was considered a Key Audit 
Matter.

►

►

►

►

►

Assessed the data that supports the
judgements that were included in the data
models.

Assessed the movements in the cases profile
including changes in status and ageing.

Involved our data quality specialists to assess
the accuracy and integrity of both the data
(historical information over a two year period)
and the workings of the models. This was
completed using data analytic procedures to
re-perform, re-calculate and check key
calculations.

Assessed the completeness of the portfolio
included in the data model.

Considered the adequacy of the financial
report disclosures contained in Notes 3.1 and
Note 4.3, in particular those regarding
assumptions to which the outcome of the data
models is most sensitive.

Recoverability of Trade Receivables and Disbursements and Associated Provisioning 

Why significant 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter 

Trade receivables and disbursements are 
significant to the Group, comprising 24.8% of 
total assets, net of provisions for impairment.  

The recoverability of trade receivables and 
disbursements is a highly subjective area due 
to the nature of the legal case profile and the 
level of judgement applied by the Group in 
determining provisions.  

The timing of the recognition of trade 
receivables is also subject to judgement as it is 
related to the progress and expectation of 
successful case outcomes. 

Accordingly, this was considered a Key Audit 
Matter.

Our procedures included the following: 

►

Assessed the assumptions used to calculate
the trade receivables and disbursements
provisions for impairment.

► We assessed the timing of the recognition of
invoices in line with the expectation of
successful case outcomes. We obtained
evidence to support the case status for
ongoing matters and assessed against the
coding guidelines of the Group.

► We performed analyses of ageing of

receivables and disbursements, collection
history, future collections strategies and
assessment of significant overdue individual
trade receivables and disbursements.

►

Considered the adequacy of disclosures of
Note 4.2 to the financial report.

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

Page 75 

83

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Litigation Matters and Subsequent Events 

Why significant 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter 

The Group is and was subject to a number of 
Shareholder Class Actions and other legal 
proceedings. These matters are detailed in 
Note 7.4 and Note 7.5. 

In December 2017, the Federal Court 
approved a scheme of arrangement between 
the Group and shareholder claimants which 
became legally effective. Under the scheme of 
shareholder arrangements the claimants 
released the company and its officers from 
any shareholder claims. 

Certain matters detailed in Note 7.4 and Note 
7.3 remain ongoing. 

Due to the subjective nature of accounting for 
the scheme of arrangement, the ongoing 
matters and the related disclosures, this was 
considered a Key Audit Matter.

Our procedures included the following: 

►

►

►

►

Obtained all settlement and claim
documentation in relation to the settled Class
Action and other legal proceedings.

For those matters ongoing, met with the
Group’s Internal General Counsel in relation to
the status of the legal proceedings and to
assess how these matters were accounted for
or disclosed.

Considered the conditions noted in Note 7.4
and Note 7.5 for factual accuracy.

Considered the adequacy of the financial
report disclosures contained in Note 7.4 and
Note 7.5.

Information Other than the Financial Report and Auditor’s Report Thereon 

The directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the 
information included in the Company’s 2018 Annual Report other than the financial report and our 
auditor’s report thereon. The Company’s 2018 Annual Report is expected to be made available to us 
after the date of this auditor’s report. We obtained the Directors’ Report that is to be included in the 
Annual Report, prior to the date of this auditor’s report, and we expect to obtain the remaining 
sections of the Annual Report after the date of this auditor’s report.  

Our opinion on the financial report does not cover the other information and we do not and will not 
express any form of assurance conclusion thereon, with the exception of the Remuneration Report 
and our related assurance opinion. 

In connection with our audit of the financial report, our responsibility is to read the other information 
and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial 
report or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.  

If, based on the work we have performed on the other information obtained prior to the date of this 
auditor’s report, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are 
required to report that fact. We have nothing to report in this regard. 

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

84

Page 76 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Responsibilities of the Directors for the Financial Report 

The directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a 
true and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 
and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of the 
financial report that gives a true and fair view and is free from material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error. 

In preparing the financial report, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters relating to going concern and using the 
going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the Group or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 

Auditor's Responsibilities for the Audit of the Financial Report 

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial report as a whole is 
free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that 
includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an 
audit conducted in accordance with the Australian Auditing Standards will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material 
if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of this financial report. 

As part of an audit in accordance with the Australian Auditing Standards, we exercise professional 
judgment and maintain professional scepticism throughout the audit. We also: 

► Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to

fraud or error, design and perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain audit
evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of not
detecting a material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than for one resulting from
error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the
override of internal control.

► Obtain an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit in order to design audit

procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an
opinion on the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control.

► Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting

estimates and related disclosures made by the directors.

► Conclude on the appropriateness of the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting
and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to
events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the Group’s ability to continue as a going
concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in
our auditor’s report to the related disclosures in the financial report or, if such disclosures are
inadequate, to modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up
to the date of our auditor’s report. However, future events or conditions may cause the Group to
cease to continue as a going concern.

► Evaluate the overall presentation, structure and content of the financial report, including the

disclosures, and whether the financial report represents the underlying transactions and events
in a manner that achieves fair presentation.

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

Page 77 

85

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018► Obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the financial information of the entities or

business activities within the Group to express an opinion on the financial report. We are
responsible for the direction, supervision and performance of the Group audit. We remain solely
responsible for our audit opinion.

We communicate with the directors regarding, among other matters, the planned scope and timing of 
the audit and significant audit findings, including any significant deficiencies in internal control that we 
identify during our audit. 

We also provide the directors with a statement that we have complied with relevant ethical 
requirements regarding independence, and to communicate with them all relationships and other 
matters that may reasonably be thought to bear on our independence, and where applicable, related 
safeguards. 

From the matters communicated to the directors, we determine those matters that were of most 
significance in the audit of the financial report of the current year and are therefore the key audit 
matters. We describe these matters in our auditor’s report unless law or regulation precludes public 
disclosure about the matter or when, in extremely rare circumstances, we determine that a matter 
should not be communicated in our report because the adverse consequences of doing so would 
reasonably be expected to outweigh the public interest benefits of such communication. 

Report on the Audit of the Remuneration Report 

Opinion on the Remuneration Report 

We have audited the Remuneration Report included in pages 18 to 30 of the directors' report for the 
year ended 30 June 2018. 

In our opinion, the Remuneration Report of Slater and Gordon Limited for the year ended 30 June 
2018, complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001. 

Responsibilities 

The directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation and presentation of the 
Remuneration Report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001. Our 
responsibility is to express an opinion on the Remuneration Report, based on our audit conducted in 
accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. 

Ernst & Young 

Christopher George 
Partner 
Melbourne 
29 August 2018 

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited 
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation 

86

Page 78 

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Additional ASX Information

In accordance with the Australian Stock Exchange Limited Listing Rules, the Directors provide the following information as 
at 31 August 2018. 

(a).  Distribution of shareholders and option holders.

Holding

1
1,001

5,001
10,001

- 1,000
- 5,000

- 10,000
- 100,000

100,001

- Over

Number of Ordinary Shareholders

13,000
418

64
34

10

13,526

There are 11,028 shareholders holding less than a marketable parcel of 161 shares each (i.e. less than $500 per 
parcel of shares).

(b). 

Twenty largest shareholders 

Shareholder 
AIO V FINANCE (IRELAND) DAC
TCA OPPORTUNITY INVESTMENTS SARL
YORK GLOBAL FINANCE BDH LLC
MERRILL LYNCH (AUSTRALIA) NOMINEES PTY LIMITED
PERPETUAL CORPORATE TRUST LIMITED
BURLINGTON LOAN MANAGEMENT DAC

RIVER BIRCH MASTER FUND LP
DEUTSCHE BANK AG
VARDE INVESTMENT PARTNERS LP
PA VIEW OPPORTUNITY IV LIMITED
MR STUART JAMES MATTHEWS
MISS SHUHONG YANG

MR GREGORY WILLIAM SEDGMAN
MR KEN FOWLIE
MR PETER JOHN KLASEN
CHAWLA FAMILY PTY LTD 
MR PENG REN
CITICORP NOMINEES PTY LIMITED

JBWERE (NZ) NOMINEES LIMITED <43941 A/C>
HSBC CUSTODY NOMINEES (AUSTRALIA) LIMITED

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

19.
20.

Number of Shares held    

37,100,244
6,190,736
5,802,877
4,324,093
3,591,500
3,156,207

2,872,374
1,346,814
1,167,332
460,611
76,796
64,652

55,941
50,963
50,601
50,000
50,000
43,588

42,976
40,876

% held
53.36
8.90
8.35
6.22
5.17
4.54

4.13
1.94
1.68
0.66
0.11
0.09

0.08
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.06

0.06
0.06

TOTAL: Top 20 holders of Fully Paid Ordinary Shares

66,539,181

95.70

(c).

Substantial Shareholders

A  substantial  shareholder  is  one  who  has  a  relevant  interest  in  5  per  cent  or  more  of  the  total  issued  shares  in  the 
Company.  Following  are  the  substantial  shareholders  in  the  Company  based  on  notifications  provided  to  the 
Company under the Corporations Act 2001:

Shareholder

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10.
11.
12.

AIO V FINANCE (IRELAND) DAC
TCA OPPORTUNITY INVESTMENTS SARL
YORK GLOBAL FINANCE BDH LLC

MERRILL LYNCH (AUSTRALIA) NOMINEES PTY LIMITED
PERPETUAL CORPORATE TRUST LIMITED
BURLINGTON LOAN MANAGEMENT DAC
RIVER BIRCH MASTER FUND LP
DEUTSCHE BANK AG
VARDE INVESTMENT PARTNERS LP

PA VIEW OPPORTUNITY IV LIMITED
ARCM MASTERFUND 3 LTD
SLATER AND GORDON LTD 

Number

60,050,874
60,050,874
60,050,874

60,051,057
60,050,874
60,050,874
60,050,874
60,050,874
60,050,874

60,050,874
60,050,874
60,050,874

Ordinary
Shares
% * 

95
95
95

95
95
95
95
95
95

95
95
95

* Percentage of shares in which a relevant interest is held based on total issued capital of the Company at the time a substantial shareholder notice was provided to the Company.

87

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018(d). 

Voting Rights

All issued ordinary shares carry one vote per 

share. (e).

Corporate Governance Statement 

The  Company’s  Corporate  Governance  Statement  can  be 
at: https://www.slatergordon.com.au/the-firm/governance

found  on 

the  Company’s  website

A

88

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018Corporate Directory

Directors
James MacKenzie, Chair
Merrick Howes
Elana Rubin
Hayden Stephens
Nils Stoesser
Jacqui Walters

Company Secretary
Michael Neilson

Registered Office and
Corporate Office
Level 12
485 La Trobe Street
Melbourne Victoria 3000
Telephone: (03) 9602 6888
Facsimile: (03) 9600 0290

Company Website
www.slatergordon.com.au

Company Numbers
ACN 097 297 400
ABN 93 097 297 400

Share/Security Registers
The Registrar
Computershare Investor 
Services Pty Ltd
Yarra Falls 
452 Johnston Street
Abbotsford Victoria 3067
GPO Box 2975
Melbourne Victoria 3001

Telephone
Toll Free 1300 850 505 
(Australia)
+61 3 9415 4000
(Overseas)

Investor Centre Website:
www.computershare.com.au

Email: 
web.queries@computershare.com.au

Auditors
Ernst & Young 
8 Exhibition Street
Melbourne Victoria 3000

Bankers
Westpac Banking 
Corporation
Level 7
150 Collins Street
Melbourne Victoria 3000

Macquarie Bank
Level 23
101 Collins Street
Melbourne Victoria 3000

Solicitors
Minter Ellison
Level 23
525 Collins Street
Melbourne Victoria 3000

Securities Exchange Listing
Slater and Gordon Limited
shares are listed on the 
Australian Securities 
Exchange. The Home 
Exchange is Melbourne.
ASX Code: SGH

Slater & Gordon Limited Annual Report 2018

89

S

l

a

t

e

r

&

G

o

r

d

o

n

L

i

m

i

t

e

d

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

8